L. Seismic Demand: Forces and deformations caused by a Code seismic event that must be resisted or accommodated by a structure, component, or system.
M. Seismic Forces: Forces acting in any direction due to the action of an earthquake as defined in the Building Code.
N. Special Inspector: An IAS accredited CBC Special Inspection Agency or qualified Professional Engineer who demonstrates competence, to the satisfaction of the building official (or Authority Having Jurisdiction - AHJ), for inspection of the Designated Seismic System.
O. Support: Elements used to support the weight (gravity load) of an item. Where the support is located at a seismic brace, the element may also resist tension/compression reactions from the restraint system.
P. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association (VISCMA).
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Delegated-Design Submittal: Prepare, seal, and sign seismic restraint Shop Drawings and signed by a Professional Engineer. Indicate restraint details including materials, quantities, anchor bolts, size and embedment of anchor bolts, base plate setting details and locations, and location, direction and magnitudes of project related loads transferred to the structure.
2. Include sufficient information regarding the component attachments to verify compliance with applicable codes and standards.
3. Use of proprietary restraint systems with a Certificate of Compliance verified and listed by an IAS accredited Inspection Agency is acceptable..
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 3
100% Design Submittal
C. Seismic Calculations:
1. Prepare, seal, and sign seismic calculations by a Civil or Structural Professional Engineer and submit with Shop Drawings.
2. Include sufficient information regarding component attachments to verify a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness that demonstrates compliance with applicable codes and standards.
D. Special Seismic Certification of Designated Mechanical Equipment, Electrical Equipment and Distribution Systems:
1. Each manufacturer of Designated Seismic System submit a Certificate of Compliance indicating that the component and its mounting system and anchorage have been tested or analyzed to withstand required seismic demands and maintain operability following the design Building Code earthquake. Provide qualification based on shake table testing or by engineering analysis as specified below.
2. Shake Table Testing:
a. Qualification: Be by an actual test on a shake table with three-dimensional shock tests and an analytical method using dynamic characteristics and forces or experience data based upon nationally recognized procedures acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Engineer.
b. Verify certificate by an IAS accredited Inspection Agency or other independent inspection entity acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and Engineer. c. Label components with an identification applied on the product by manufacturer that contains manufacturer’s name, function and performance characteristics of the product or material, and name and identification of accredited Inspection Agency.
Indicate that representative sample of the product or material and its testing have been evaluated and listed by accredited Inspection Agency.
3. Engineering Analysis:
a. If a particular component has not been evaluated by shake table testing and listed by an accredited Inspection Agency, then qualification by analysis performed by a Professional Engineer. Include an evaluation of stress and deformation developed through entire load path from center of applied seismic load to equipment anchorage. Perform analysis considering dynamic characteristics and response spectrum required by the Building Code.
b. Special Seismic Certification: For distribution systems such as piping and ductwork, include a stress analysis of the pipe and duct, supports, bracing, and anchors. Include gravity and seismic demand stress analysis, an analytical assessment of connections, and consideration for movement of attachment points.
In the analysis, consider the effects of in-line devices, where present. 1) Fire Protection Piping: Conformances with NFPA 13 will satisfy requirements for Special Seismic Certification.
4. Engineer’s Qualifications: Submit certification and experience documentation for the Professional Engineer indicating a minimum of 5 years’ experience providing engineering services of the kind indicated when analysis or shake table testing is the justification for the Certification for each Designated Seismic System. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For All equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Material & Product certificates.
D. Material test reports.
E. Product test reports.
F. Research reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the California Building Code (CBC) latest adopted Edition by the jurisdiction where the Project is located and applicable local and statewide adopted amendments.
B. Special Seismic Certification: Provide Certification in accordance with CBC, Chapter 17 and ASCE 7 Chapter 13 and 15 requirements for Designated Seismic Systems.
C. Provide Special Inspections for installation, inspection and testing of the following per CBC Chapter 17:
1. Seismic Design Category E:
a. Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) ductwork containing hazardous materials or smoke control and anchorage of such ductwork. b. Piping systems and mechanical units containing flammable, combustible or highly toxic materials.
c. Anchorage of electrical equipment used for emergency or standby power systems. d. Vibration-isolated systems and associated seismic restraints where indicated on Contract Documents or submittals. All restraints require a nominal clearance of
0.25 inch or less between the equipment support frame and restraint. e. Exterior wall panels and their anchorage.
f. Suspended ceiling systems and their anchorage.
1) Verify member type and size, verify that bracing elements such as splayed wires and compression struts are installed as detailed; test anchorage to structure.
g. Steel storage racks 8 feet or higher:
1) Verify that rack connections to the structure are installed as detailed on Shop Drawings. Spot check the connection of horizontal beams to uprights verifying fastener tightness.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 5
100% Design Submittal
h. Access floors:
1) Verify that anchorage matches detail on the Shop Drawings. 2) Verify connection of access floor framing to support posts. 3) Inspect installation of post-installed anchors.
4) Test post installed anchors.
i. Electrical equipment.
1.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Seismic Certifications:
1. Verify that the label, anchorage and mounting conform to the Certificate of Compliance for Designated Seismic Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide seismic restraint of nonstructural components to withstand seismic demands without displacing or overturning.
B. Provide non-building structures designed and constructed to withstand seismic demands as specified herein.
C. For Designated Seismic Systems, provide installations capable of providing post-earthquake functionality.
2.2 PROJECT SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Seismic Design Category E.
B. Seismic Design Force: Base calculation of seismic design force on requirements of ASCE 7 including Chapter 11 through Chapter 15 with the following seismic design parameters:
1. SS = 2.053: Mapped Short Period Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter.
2. S1 = 0.781: Mapped 1 s. Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter.
3. SDS = 1.367: Design Short Period Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter.
4. SD1 = 0.884: Design 1 s. Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter.
5. Ie = 1.25: Building or Structure Importance Factor.
6. IP = 1.0: Component Importance Factor.
C. Seismic Relative Displacement: Ensure design accommodates seismic relative displacement of
0.02 times the story height in addition to thermal movement that may be present.
D. Seismic Separation between Independent Structures – Design components crossing seismic separations accommodate relative seismic movement between structures. Locations of seismic ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 6
100% Design Submittal
separations are shown on the drawings. Use the following to determine the range of movement required at each floor. Independently anchor components to each structure.
1. Δ A1-B1 = XX" (i.e., +/- xx"/2).
2. Δ A2-B2 = XX" (i.e., +/- xx"/2).
3. Δ A3-B3 = XX" (i.e., +/- xx"/2).
4. Δ ARoof-BRoof = XX" (i.e., +/- xx"/2).
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Anchor Bolts and Post-Installed Anchors:
1. Cast-in Anchor Bolts or Headed Studs: Use whenever possible and design in accordance with Section 1912 of the CBC and ACI 318 Chapter 17. Do not use post-installed expansion anchors for critical fastening such as vibrating conditions and impact loads.
2. Expansion or Sleeve Anchors: Pre-qualify for use in seismic applications per ASTM E 488 and current ICC-ES evaluation reports.
3. Adhesive Anchors: Pre-qualify for use in seismic applications per ASTM E 488 and current ICC-ES evaluation reports.
4. For components weighing over 400 pounds: Minimum 5/8-inch diameter anchor size with minimum 5-inch embedment.
5. For components weighing less than 400 pounds: Minimum 3/8-inch diameter anchor size with minimum 3-inch embedment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Do not fabricate or install seismic restraints or non-building structures until submittals have been approved by the Engineer.
B. Verify that multiple systems installed in the same vicinity can be installed without conflict.
C. Verify tolerances between installed items to confirm that unbraced components will not come into contact with restrained equipment or structural members during an earthquake. When contact is possible, provide seismic restraint or provide justification to Engineer’s satisfaction that contact will not cause unacceptable damage to the components in contact, their supports, finishes or other elements that are contacted.
3.2 DESIGN AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Attach or anchor components and their supports, non-building structures, and Designated Seismic Systems to the structure. Provide a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between the component and the supporting structure.
B. Design equipment support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 7
100% Design Submittal
C. Provide supports, braces, connections, hardware, and anchoring devices to withstand coderequired seismic forces and seismic deformations without shifting or overturning.
D. For components with Ip = 1.5, in addition to providing for code-required seismic forces and deformations, construct installations capable of providing post-earthquake functionality.
E. Bolt, weld, or otherwise positively fastened component attachments in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter 13 without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity.
F. Where equipment is mounted on vibration isolators and restraints, use isolators and restraints designed for amplified code forces per ASCE 7 and with demonstrated ability to resist required forces including gravity, operational, and seismic forces.
G. As an alternate to project-specific design of seismic bracing, use of proprietary restraint systems with a Certificate of Compliance verified and listed by an accredited Inspection Agency is acceptable. Use of a certified product does not preclude the requirement for Shop Drawings.
H. Design piping, piping risers, ducts, and duct risers to accommodate interstory drift.
I. Provide flexible connections:
1. Between floor-mounted equipment and suspended piping.
2. Between unbraced piping and restrained suspended items.
3. As required for thermal movement.
4. At building separations and seismic joints.
5. Wherever relative differential movements could damage piping in an earthquake.
J. Where piping is explicitly exempt from seismic bracing requirements, provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils.
K. Where piping is explicitly exempt from seismic bracing requirements, install piping such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging impact with adjacent components, finishes or structural framing. This will be considered satisfied if there is horizontal clear distance of at least 2/3 the hanger length between subject components. If swinging of exempted piping can cause damaging contact with adjacent components, finishes or structural framing, add swing restraints as required to eliminate contact.
L. Ductwork:
1. Provide independent support for in-line devices weighing more than 20 pounds.
2. Provide independent support and bracing for in-line devices weighing more than 75 pounds.
M. Provide unbraced piping attached to braced in-line equipment with adequate flexibility to accommodate differential displacements.
N. Tanks:
1. Design tank to resist seismic design forces.
2. Design tank anchorage to resist seismic design forces. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Seismic Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018829 - 8
100% Design Submittal
3. Design tank legs or supporting structure to resist seismic design forces.
4. Provide flexible connections between tank and interconnected piping.
O. Fire suppression equipment and piping:
1. See requirements for piping.
2. See requirements for equipment.
3. Satisfy requirements of NFPA 13 and the force and displacement requirements of ASCE
7. All components: UL listed.
4. Provide end of line restraint as required by NFPA 13.
P. Conduit, cable tray, bus duct, raceways, bundled cabling:
1. Provide gravity support for conduit/cable tray/bus duct/raceway/bundled cabling that is independent of suspended ceiling framing.
2. Provide seismic bracing of conduit/cable tray/bus duct/raceway/bundled cabling to resist gravity and seismic design forces.
3. Design conduit/cable tray/bus duct/raceway/bundled cabling to accommodate interstory drift.
4. Provide flexible connections wherever relative differential movement could damage conduit/cable tray/bus duct/raceway/bundled cabling in an earthquake.
END OF SECTION 018829
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wind Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018839 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 018839 - WIND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Performance requirements and design criteria for wind restraint.
2. Delegated Design of structures, exterior equipment and components, nonstructural components and nonbuilding structures, due to the action of wind, to be designed by performance specification and where otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Requirements regarding applicable Codes, basis-of-design, and load criteria to be used in the detailed design of delegated design project components and systems to be designed under other Sections.
4. Design and provide complete wind restraint systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Anchorage: Connection to structure typically through the use of welds, bolts, screws, anchor bolts, post-installed anchors, or other fasteners selected to meet the Building Code.
B. Component: A part of an architectural, electrical, or mechanical system which is manufactured as an independent unit, subsystem, or subassembly, that can be joined with other parts to form a more complex item or assembly.
C. Nonstructural Component: A part of an architectural, mechanical, or electrical system within or without a building or nonbuilding structure including its supports and anchorage.
D. Restraint/Bracing: Restraint, bracing or anchorage used to limit movement under wind forces.
Cables or rigid elements, i.e., strut, pipe, and angles, used to resist forces by uniaxial tension or compression. Term "bracing" may also be used to describe design to resist lateral forces through the use of wall, beam, or frame elements.
E. Special Inspector: An International Accreditation Service (IAS) accredited CBC Special Inspection Agency or qualified Professional Engineer who demonstrates competence, to satisfaction of building official or Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), for inspection of Delegated Design components and nonstructural systems.
F. Support: Elements used to support the weight (gravity load) of an item. Where support is located at a wind brace, the element may also resist tension/compression reactions, and bending moments from the restraint system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wind Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018839 - 2
100% Design Submittal
G. Wind Deformations: Drifts, deflections and relative displacements determined in accordance with the applicable wind requirements of the Building Code.
H. Wind Demand: Forces and deformations caused by Building Code wind loads that must be resisted or accommodated by a structure, system, component, restraint/bracing, anchorage or support.
I. Wind Forces: Forces acting in any direction due to the action of wind as defined in the Building Code.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Provide wind restraint submittals with associated structure, equipment, or component submittal.
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Provide wind restraint submittals with associated structure, equipment, or component submittal.
B. Delegated design professional to provide necessary additional special tests and inspection requirements covering the work of their submittal. Identify items that necessitate inspections not already identified in Contract Documents.
C. Submit analysis data documenting compliance with design criteria.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit wind restraint Shop Drawings that are prepared, sealed, and signed by a Professional Engineer.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, mounting and anchorage details in submittal. Indicate restraint details including member sizes, materials, quantities, anchorage details including size and embedment of anchor bolts, base plate setting details and locations, and location, direction and magnitudes of project related loads transferred to the structure.
3. Include sufficient information regarding component anchorage to verify compliance with this Section and applicable Codes and Standards.
4. Anchorage Layout Drawings, indicating size and location of anchorage bolts in relation to supporting substrate materials.
a. Details of structure, equipment, or component anchorage to foundation or structure, including anchor type, size, material, embedment depth, and minimum edge distance.
b. Summary of maximum vertical and horizontal reactions at each anchor considering applicable load and load combinations, based upon specified design criteria. c. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Where required, detail fabrication including anchorages and attachment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wind Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018839 - 3
100% Design Submittal
d. Identify specified loads and load combinations. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
E. Calculations:
1. Prepare, seal, and sign calculations by a Professional Engineer and submit with Shop Drawings.
2. Include sufficient information regarding component restraints, attachments, and anchorage to verify a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness that demonstrates compliance with this Section and applicable Codes and Standards.
3. Calculations are submitted for Project record and will not be reviewed by Engineer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the California Building Code (CBC) latest adopted Edition by jurisdiction where the Project is located and applicable local and statewide adopted amendments.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis and Shop Drawings by a registered professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in State and jurisdiction where Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design wind restraint related systems.
B. Select products meeting requirements of applicable Codes.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide wind restraint of nonstructural components to withstand wind demands without displacing or overturning.
B. Provide non-building structures designed and constructed to withstand specified wind demands.
2.3 PROJECT WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Use following basic wind design criteria in project calculations. Determine other factors in accordance with ASCE 7.
1. Basic Wind Speed:
a. VULT = 102 miles per hour miles per hour.
b. VASD = 80 miles per hour miles per hour.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wind Performance Requirements Renovation & Expansion Final Design 018839 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Wind Exposure Category: C.
3. Risk Category: III.
2.4 COMBINATION OF LOADS
A. Use wind loads in combination with all other applicable design loads, including but not limited to dead loads, live loads, rain loads, snow loads, ice loads, seismic loads, flood loads, earth and ground water pressures, and self-straining in accordance with load combinations of ASCE 7 and the Code.
B. Determine most severe distribution, concentration, and combination of design loads and forces and then use in the design conforming with the Code. Design to meet code requirements and to satisfy all combinations of loads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Verify that multiple systems installed in same vicinity can be installed without conflict.
B. Use wind design criteria in conjunction with appropriate load factors and load combinations in accordance with ASCE 7 and the Code.
C. Do not fabricate or install wind restraints until submittals have been approved by Engineer.
3.2 DESIGN AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Design component, support, and bracing to resist wind design force in any direction.
B. Provide supports, braces, connections, hardware, and anchoring devices to withstand Coderequired wind forces, including maximum permissible displacements, without shifting and overturning.
C. Attach or anchor components and their supports to the structure. Provide a continuous load path meeting requirements of this Section and applicable Codes and Standards between the component and supporting structure.
END OF SECTION 018839
Division 02
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
4. Waste management and disposal of demolished materials, including salvage, recycling, and diversion from landfill.
a. Selective demolition to support future expansion and renovation work, including provisions for protecting construction to remain.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01112 "Description of Work" for general scope of work.
2. Section 01323 "Construction status Reports" for status reports.
3. Section 01740 "Demobilization" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements not part of selective demolition.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B. Remove Hazardous Materials: Isolate and remove hazardous materials from existing construction and properly dispose as required by existing regulations.
C. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
D. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
E. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 2
100% Design Submittal
F. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. Contractor shall sort materials in accordance with waste management plan and local recycling guidelines.
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 3
100% Design Submittal
operations. Comply with Section 01322 “Construction Progress Photography." Submit before Work begins.
E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.
F. Waste Management Plan: Submit a plan describing procedures for reuse, recycling, and disposal of non-hazardous demolition materials. Indicate anticipated quantities and types of materials to be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill. The plan shall include Company-based compliance, documentation procedures during construction and Universal waste compliance and verification.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
G. Contractor shall provide and maintain daily cleaning of demolition area to prevent dust migration and ensure safe access.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 4
100% Design Submittal
as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Environmental Requirements: Comply with applicable local sustainability ordinances related to material reuse and recycling goals. Comply with CALGreen Code Section 5.408.1 Construction Waste Management.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C. Perform or Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01322 “Construction Progress Photography."
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01572 “Erosion Control Plan."
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame-cutting operations.
6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 7
100% Design Submittal
9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
11. Separate and stockpile recyclable and salvageable materials where practical. Do not commingle with general demolition debris.
12. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Transport materials to approved recycling or disposal facilities.
13. Provide documentation of material weights or volumes diverted from landfill through reuse or recycling.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete.
Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.
C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Selective Demolition Renovation & Expansion Final Design 024119 - 8
100% Design Submittal
D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished and then break up and remove.
E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Division 07 for new roofing requirements.
1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.
2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 030130.71 - MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Cutting, removing, or modifying parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances.
2. Addressing existing steel reinforcing bars encountered.
3. Bonding new concrete or grout to existing concrete.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete” for related work.
2. Section 036000 “Grouting” for grout and related accessories.
3. Section 050519 “Post-Installed Anchors” for anchors and related accessories.
4. Section 055000 “Metals Fabrications” for various metals and related fabrications.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Submit manufacturer's technical literature and installation instructions that include:
a. Current printed recommendations and product data sheets for products including performance criteria, product life, working time after mixing, surface preparation and application requirements and procedures, curing, volatile organic compound data, and safety requirements.
b. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Documentation of the qualifications for Contractor qualifications, Manufacturer's qualifications, and Contractor's supervisor as specified in Part 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.
B. Material Certificates: For each material provided.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Have a minimum of ten years’ experience within last 10 years in manufacture and use of specified products and have an ongoing program of training, certifying, and technically supporting Contractor's personnel.
B. Contractor Qualifications: Complete a program of instruction in application of approved manufacturer's material and provide certification from manufacturer attesting to their training and status as an approved applicator.
C. Contractor's Supervisor: Have attended a training program sponsored by manufacturer supplying materials approved for this project.
D. Manufacturer’s Representative: A representative of product manufacturer who will visit the site for first three days of installation to give instructions to installation crew. Make periodic site visits to ensure products being installed are in accordance with published instructions.
E. Be solely responsible for workmanship and quality of modification work. Inspections by the manufacturer, the Engineer, or others do not limit Contractor's responsibility for work quality.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original, new and unopened packages and containers clearly labeled with the following information:
1. Manufacturer's name.
2. Name or title of material, and other product identification.
3. Manufacturer's stock number and batch number.
4. Date of manufacture.
5. Instructions.
6. Expiration date.
B. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturers' published recommendations and the following supplementary requirements:
1. Store only approved materials on site and in locations as directed.
2. Keep area clean and accessible.
3. Comply with health and fire regulations including those of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
C. Handling: Handle products carefully and in accordance with manufacturers' published recommendations and the following supplementary requirements:
1. Prevent inclusion of foreign materials.
2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory work has been completed and application work will start immediately.
Division 03
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with this Section and applicable state and local regulations.
B. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Product: Two-component, solvent-free, asbestos-free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bind plastic concrete to hardened concrete and complying with requirements of ASTM C 881, Type V, Grade 2, Class C.
C. Epoxy Paste Adhesive:
1. Product: Two-component, solvent-free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used as an adhesive for mating surfaces where the glue line is 1/8 inch or less and to bond fresh, plastic concrete to clean, sound hardened concrete and complying with requirements of ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class C.
D. Repair Mortar (Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Mortar):
1. Horizontal Surfaces:
a. Product: Two-component polymer-modified, portland cement based mortar used to repair horizontal surfaces with a migrating corrosion inhibitor and having a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days tested in accordance with ASTM C 881 or ASTM C 109.
2. Vertical and Overhead Surfaces:
a. Product: Two-component polymer-modified, portland cement based, fast setting, non-sag mortar used to repair vertical and overhead surfaces with a migrating corrosion inhibitor and having a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days tested in accordance with ASTM C 881 or ASTM C 109.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which modification work is to be installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer.
B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 4
100% Design Submittal
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Do not shift, cut, remove, or otherwise alter existing structure or concrete until authorization is given by the Engineer.
B. When removing materials from or making openings in existing structures, take precautions and erect necessary barriers, shoring and bracing, and other protective devices. Prevent damage to structures beyond limits necessary for new work, protect personnel, control dust, and to prevent damage to structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
C. Unless otherwise permitted, shown, or specified, cut existing concrete by line drilling.
D. Construction Tolerances: Comply with requirements specified elsewhere in Division 03, except as modified herein, and elsewhere in Contract Documents.
E. Make locations and phases of the work available for access by the Engineer or other personnel designated by the Engineer. Provide ventilation and safe access to the work.
F. Cut, remove, or otherwise modify parts of existing structures or appurtenances as indicated, specified, or as necessary to complete the work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, and similar materials are specified in their respective Sections. Install work complying with requirements of this Section and as indicated.
G. Locations, details, and limits of modifications are indicated on Drawings. Comply with requirements of this Section and as indicated on Drawings.
H. Examine areas and conditions under which modification work is to be installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer.
I. Store, mix, apply, and cure materials in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Where concrete is to be modified near an expansion joint or control joint, preserve isolation between components on either side of the joint.
K. When drilling holes for dowels and bolts or when coring holes for slab or wall penetrations, stop drilling if reinforcing is encountered. Do not cut reinforcing without prior approval by the Engineer. Relocate hole to avoid reinforcing as approved by the Engineer.
1. Identify reinforcing locations prior to drilling using reinforcing bar locators so that drill hole locations may be adjusted to avoid reinforcing interference.
L. Saw-cut edges for modification areas vertically and horizontally straight. Make intersecting cuts perpendicular to each other.
M. Stop saw cutting if reinforcing is encountered. Do not cut reinforcing without prior approval by the Engineer. Identify reinforcing locations within 1 foot of saw cut locations in any direction prior to saw cutting using reinforcing bar locators.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 5
100% Design Submittal
N. Clean concrete surfaces of efflorescence, deteriorated concrete, dirt, laitance, and existing repair materials such as liners, adhesives, and epoxies. Remove foreign matter and deleterious films by sandblasting, oil-free air-blasting, scarifying, or other mechanical means to sound original concrete.
O. Consolidate modification materials, completely filling portions of the area to be filled.
P. Bring finished surfaces into alignment with adjacent existing surfaces to provide a uniform, flush, and even surface. Match repair surfaces to adjacent existing surfaces in texture including any coatings or surface treatments that had been provided for the existing structure.
Q. Repair or replace concrete indicated or specified to be left in place that is damaged because of the work by approved means without additional compensation.
3.3 CONCRETE REMOVAL
A. When removing materials from or making openings in existing structures, take precautions and erect necessary barriers, shoring and bracing, and other protective devices. Prevent damage to structures beyond limits necessary for new work, protect personnel, control dust, and to prevent damage to structures or contents by falling or flying debris.
B. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits indicated or directed by the Engineer, perform saw cutting 1 inch deep at limits of removal followed by line drilling and chipping, sandblasting, or oil-free airblasting, as appropriate in the areas where concrete is to be taken out.
Remove concrete such that surrounding concrete and existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment are not damaged.
1. Perform full thickness saw-cutting at limits of concrete to be removed only if indicated, herein specified, or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer.
C. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting or line drilling and no new material is to be placed on cut surface, apply a 1/4 inch thick surface treatment of epoxy paste to entire cut surface.
D. Where joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be exposed in finished work, remove concrete edge by making a 1 inch deep saw cut on each exposed surface of existing concrete or as indicated.
3.4 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Concrete areas requiring patching, repairs, or modifications, prepare connection surfaces as specified, as indicated, or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Remove loose and deteriorated materials, efflorescence, existing repair materials, dirt, oil, grease, and other bond inhibiting materials from concrete surface by dry mechanical means such as sandblasting, chipping, wire brushing, or other mechanical means as approved by the Engineer.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 6
100% Design Submittal
1. Uniformly roughen concrete surface to approximately 1/4 inch amplitude with pointed chipping tools. Thoroughly clean surface of loose or weakened material by sandblasting or air-blasting.
2. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete.
C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, mechanically clean to remove loose material, contaminants, and rust as approved by the Engineer. If half of reinforcing steel diameter is exposed, chip out behind the steel. Chip distance behind the steel to a minimum of 1 inch. Do not damage reinforcing to be incorporated in new concrete or repair mortar during removal operation.
D. Clean reinforcing from existing removed or deteriorated concrete that is shown to be incorporated in new concrete or repair mortar by mechanical means to remove loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding. Cut, bend, or lap to new reinforcing as indicated and provide with 1 inch minimum clear cover.
E. Use following specific concrete surface preparation Methods where indicated, specified, or as directed by the Engineer:
1. Method A:
a. Roughen and clean existing concrete surface at connection. b. Thoroughly saturate surfaces with water; prevent standing water during application.
c. Scrub cement paste (cement and water mixed to consistency of a thick paste) into substrate filling concrete pores and voids.
d. Place new concrete against scrub coat of cement paste while cement paste is still plastic.
2. Method B:
a. Roughen and clean existing concrete surface at connection. b. Apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surfaces.
c. Place new concrete or grout mixture to limits indicated within time constraints recommended by manufacturer to ensure bond.
3. Method C:
a. Use adhesive anchoring system, as specified in Section 050519 “Post-Installed Anchors,” for installation of reinforcing steel dowels into existing concrete where indicated.
b. Perform installation complying strictly with manufacturer's recommendations, including drill bit diameter, surface preparation, injection, and installation of dowels.
c. Drill concrete to embedded deformed bars to indicated depths. d. Use oil-free compressed air to blast out loose particles and dust from drilled holes.
Clean dowels to be free of dirt, oil, grease, ice, or other deleterious material that would reduce bond.
e. Concrete in existing structures is considered to have a strength of 3,000 psi. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 7
100% Design Submittal
4. Method D:
a. Combination of Method B & Method C.
3.5 GROUTING
A. Grout: As specified in Section 036000 “Grouting.”
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect completed installations.
1. Perform inspection with Contractor, material installer, and the Engineer present. Give minimum of 72 hours’ notice prior to time of inspection.
2. Repair modifications not in conformance with Contract Documents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at no additional cost to Owner.
3. At completion of non-conforming repairs, Contractor, material installer, and the Engineer to reinspect the repaired problem areas.
4. Prepare inspection reports, identifying acceptable work, type and locations of unacceptable work, and actions taken to correct unacceptable work.
5. Complete field quality control work without additional compensation.
END OF SECTION 030130.71
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Modifications to Existing Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 030130.71 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 033010 – MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 036000 “Grouting” for grouting.
2. Section 050519 “Post-Installed Anchors” for post installed adhesive anchoring system.
3. Section 312000 "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag; materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete Subcontractor.
2. Review steel reinforcement installation; anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances; construction, joints; forms and form removal limitations; cold- and hotweather concreting procedures; packaged dry combined materials; curing procedures; concrete finishes and finishing; special inspection and testing, and Contractor’s inspecting agency procedures for field quality control; concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Concrete Design Mixtures: Design Mixtures: For each formulation of concrete proposed for use, submit constituent quantities per cubic yard (cubic meter), water cementitious ratio, air content, concrete slump, type and manufacturer of cement and type and manufacturer of fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag. Provide either:
1. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records.
2. Water cementitious ratio curve for concrete mixes based on laboratory tests.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, spacing, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Reference bars to be the same identification marks shown on the bar bending details.
D. Construction Joint Layout: As shown on the Drawings.
E. Material Certificates: For each of the following:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Bonding agents.
F. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Aggregates: Conformance to ASTM standards, including sieve analysis, mechanical properties, and deleterious substance content, and mortar bar expansion test results, proof that the aggregate non-reactive.
2. Mill Test Reports: Conformance to ASTM standards, including chemical analysis and physical tests.
a. Cementitious materials.
b. Steel Reinforcing.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
B. Certifications:
1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and the aggregates.
2. Certificate of conformance for concrete production facilities from the NRMCA.
C. Field quality-control reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 3
100% Design Submittal
D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
1. Verify personnel conducting field tests qualified as ACI Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Verify personnel performing laboratory tests are ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Verify Testing agency laboratory supervisor is an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement free from mill scale, rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, or other foreign matter that will reduce or destroy bond. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Store reinforcement off the ground, protect from moisture, and keep out of standing water, and free from rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, or other contaminants and deleterious matter that will reduce or destroy bond.
B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.
C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. Limit total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation to six months or the manufacturer’s recommended storage time, whichever is less.
D. Remove immediately from the site material which becomes damp, contains lumps, or is hardened and replace with acceptable material.
E. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1. When average of the highest and lowest temperature from midnight to midnight is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2. ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Surface Finish 2.0 Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.
B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Form-release agent to comply with Federal, State and local VOC limitations.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 5
100% Design Submittal
D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete, heavy high frequency vibration of the concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to retaining walls.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, new deformed bars.
B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184/A184M, fabricated from ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A184, fabricated from ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, Grade 60 ksi.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than the specified concrete strength, according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
B. Tie wires for reinforcement: 16 gauge or heavier black annealed wire to tie uncoated reinforcing.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II. Total equivalent alkali content of the cement used not to exceed 0.60 percent as provided in the Optional Chemical Requirements of ASTM C150.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F.
3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated by concrete mixtures specified herein.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.
3. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type C.
4. Water: ASTM C94/C94M and potable.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1-D, Class B, dissipating.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types V, load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 7
100% Design Submittal
B. Cementitious Materials: limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials (Portland cement alone or in combination with Fly Ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag) in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, for placement and workability.
2. High-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, may be used, for placement and workability.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Concrete Fill and Electrical Raceway Encasement:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.62.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 4 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, size 57 for concrete fill or as indicated in Section 03800 for electrical raceway encasements.
B. Structural Concrete 10-in or greater in thickness:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.44.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 4 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.
5. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, size 57.
C. Structural Concrete 10-inch or less in thickness:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.44.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inchAir Content: 4 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.
5. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, size 67.
2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 8
100% Design Submittal
2.11 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Erect, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Use form-facing materials as required to meet the surface finishes (SF) requirements of ACI 301, unless otherwise specified provide as-cast form finishes per ACI 301 as follows.
1. Surface Finish (SF-2.0)
D. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where necessary. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, ice, snow and other debris just before placing concrete.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 9
100% Design Submittal
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete.
Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations must be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Re-apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose mill scale, rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce or destroy the bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum clear concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 10
100% Design Submittal
E. Splicing:
1. Lengths of splices as indicated on the Drawings.
2. If not indicated on Drawings, locate reinforcement splices at point of minimum stress.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
2. Locate joints for foundations in the middle third of spans.
3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and at the top of footings.
4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on the Drawings.
5. At construction joints and at concrete joints indicated on Drawings to be "roughened", uniformly roughen the surface of concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points and side to side) of 1/4 inch with chipping tools to expose a fresh face.
Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. At least two hours before and again shortly before the new concrete is deposited, saturate joints with water. After glistening water disappears, coat joints with neat cement slurry mixed to consistency of very heavy paste.
Coat surfaces to a depth of at least 1/8 inch thick, scrubbed-in by means of stiff bristle brushes. Deposit new concrete before the neat cement dries.
6. Do not use keyways in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.
C. Identify water to be withheld at concrete batch plant to be added at Project site with high-range water-reducing admixtures. Constant quantity of water to be withheld from each batch of concrete. A maximum of 10 gallons of water may be withheld from each batch of concrete.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 11
100% Design Submittal
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid “cold” joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
4. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
E. Slabs and equipment foundations:
1. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
2. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
3. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
4. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
3.7 FINISHING SURFACES
A. Finish concrete surfaces according to ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Surface Finish 2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply a Smooth-Rubbed Finish per ACI 301 to exposed Surface Finish 2.0 ascast vertical concrete surfaces as specified.
D. Float Finish: Apply float finish per ACI 301 prior to broom finish or trowel finish.
E. Broom Finish: After concrete has received a float finish, apply to smooth-formed-finished ascast concrete surfaces subject to pedestrian traffic. Provide broom finish perpendicular to direction of pedestrian traffic.
F. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 12
100% Design Submittal
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and chamfers.
C. Equipment Pads:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete pads with actual equipment provided.
2. Install reinforcing dowels; to connect concrete pad to concrete floor, unless otherwise indicated.
3. For supported equipment, install anchor bolts that extend through concrete pad and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
4. Prior to placing concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Cast anchor-bolt insert into pads. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hotweather protection during curing.
B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.
C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 13
100% Design Submittal
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repair surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, voids, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, bug holes, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
D. Limit sawcut at the perimeter of the area to a depth of 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Prepare surfaces per patching mortar manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Repairing Formed Surfaces:
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects using patching mortar. On surfaces exposed to view repair by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer.
F. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:
1. Inspect unformed surfaces, such as tops of foundations or equipment pads, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Limit sawcut at the perimeter of the area to a depth of 3/4 inch. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4- inch clearance all around. Mix patching mortar per manufacturer’s recommendations, including coarse aggregate when required. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 14
100% Design Submittal
5. Correct crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
G. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
H. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Notify the Owner when the reinforcing is complete and ready for inspection, at least six working hours prior to the proposed concrete placement. Do not cover reinforcing steel with concrete until the installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing and position of the reinforcement has been inspected by the Owner’s inspection agency and the Owner’s inspection agency release to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. Keep forms open until the Owner’s inspection agency has completed inspection of the reinforcement.
C. Concrete Tests: Perform testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172/C172M according to the following requirements by the Owner’s testing agency:
1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's placement of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of discharge for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's placement of each concrete mixture. Additional tests will be performed when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method, for concrete; one test for each composite sample at the point of placement, but not less than one test for each day's placement of each concrete mixture.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M.
a. Cast and cure one set of five 6 inch x 12 inch long standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 15
100% Design Submittal
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one specimen at 7 days, test one specimen at 14 days, test two specimens at 28 days. The fifth may be used to verify strength after 28 days if the 28-day test results are low.
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any threeconsecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
9. Report test results in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Verify reports of compressive-strength tests contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break.
10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Engineer.
11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 033010
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete Renovation & Expansion Final Design 033010 - 16
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 036000 - GROUTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cement grout.
2. Concrete grout.
3. Nonshrink cementitious grout.
4. Rapid-curing epoxy grout.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 030130.71 “Modifications to Existing Concrete.”
2. Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
3. Section 042200 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for masonry grout.
4. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for grout related to miscellaneous metals.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information regarding grout and surface preparation, mixing and installation.
1. Commercially Manufactured Nonshrink Cementitious Grout: Include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, and conformity to specified ASTM standards.
2. Commercially Manufactured Nonshrink Epoxy Grout: Include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, and conformity to specified ASTM standards.
3. Cement Grout: Include type and brand of cement, gradation of fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures, and proposed grout mix.
4. Concrete grout. Include data as required for concrete and for fiber reinforcement as delineated in Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.”
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit instructions for mixing, handling, surface preparation, and placing epoxy-type and nonshrink grouts.
C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.
D. Qualifications Statement:
1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.
E. Product Certificates: Provide certification of the following:
1. Manufactured grout products and admixtures for cement grout and concrete grout are made for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation (non-toxic and free of taste and odor).
1.5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate:
1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.
2. Materials Resources Certificates:
a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products. b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project Site.
B. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products.
1. Provide cost data for following products:
a. Products with recycled material content.
b. Regional products.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to City of Redlands standards.
B. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.
C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' experience in production and use of provided grouts.
D. Independent testing laboratory meets requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM C1077 and be acceptable to Engineer. Laboratories affiliated with Contractor or in which Contractor or officers of Contractor's organization have beneficial interest are not acceptable.
E. Pre-installation Meeting: At least ten working days before grouting, hold a pre-installation meeting to review the requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing, and curing procedures for each product proposed for use. Notify all parties involved with grouting, including Engineer, of the meeting at least ten working days prior to its scheduled date. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
F. Services of Manufacturer's Representative: Provide services of a field technician of nonshrink grout manufacturer epoxy grout manufacturer who has performed at least five projects of similar size and complexity during last five years, to attend pre-installation meeting, to be present for initial installation of each type of nonshrink and epoxy grout, and to correct installation problems.
G. Field Testing:
1. All field testing and inspection services will be provided by Owner. Assist in the sampling of materials and cooperate by allowing free access to the work and permitting use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be required. Methods of testing will comply with applicable ASTM Standards.
H. Field testing of concrete grout will be as specified for concrete in Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.”
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.
B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. Limit total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation to six months or manufacturer’s recommended storage time, whichever is less.
C. Remove immediately from the site material which becomes damp, contains lumps, or is hardened and replace with acceptable material.
D. Protection:
1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location.
2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.
1.8 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Maximum Conditions: Do not perform grouting if temperatures exceed 90 degrees F.
B. Minimum Conditions: Do not perform grouting if the minimum temperature of base plates, supporting concrete and grout are less than 40 degrees F. Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F before, during, and after grouting, until grout has set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT GROUT
A. Cement: Portland cement complying with ASTM C150/C150M, Type I and II. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Water:
1. Potable.
2. No impurities, suspended particles, algae, or dissolved natural salts in quantities capable of causing:
a. Corrosion of steel.
b. Volume change increasing shrinkage cracking.
c. Efflorescence.
d. Excess air entraining.
C. Fine Aggregate:
1. Washed natural sand.
2. Gradation:
a. Comply with ASTM C33/C33M.
b. Represented by smooth granulometric curve within required limits.
3. Free from injurious amounts of organic impurities according to ASTM C40/C40M.
D. Mix:
1. Portland cement, sand, and water.
2. Do not use ferrous aggregate or staining ingredients in grout mixes.
3. 28-day Strength: 2,500 psi.
2.2 NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT
A. Description:
1. Pre-mixed and ready-for-use formulation requiring only addition of water.
2. Nonshrink, non-corrosive, nonmetallic, non-gas forming, not containing expansive cement and no chlorides.
3. No shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827/C827M.
4. For placements 3 inches and thicker, extend nonshrink cementitious grout with 3/8-inch aggregate in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Performance and Design Criteria:
1. Certified to maintain initial placement volume or expand after set, and to meet following minimum properties when tested according to ASTM C1107/C1107M for Grades B, C, D and CRD-C621 nonshrink grout:
a. Setting Time:
1) Initial: Approximately two hours.
2) Final: Approximately three hours.
3) Comply with ASTM C191.
b. Maximum Expansion: 0.10 to 0.40 percent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 5
100% Design Submittal
c. Minimum Compressive Strength:
1) One-Day: 4,000 psi.
2) Seven-Day: 7,000 psi.
3) 28-Day: 10,000 to 10,800 psi.
4) Comply with CRD-C621.
2.3 FORMWORK
A. As specified in this Section and in Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete.” Provide forms that are liquid-tight, anchored in place, and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement.
B. Provide form release agent as recommended by the grout manufacturer. For cement grout and concrete grouts, provide water-based form release agents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify areas to receive grout.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Place grout where indicated or specified over existing concrete and cured concrete which has attained its specified design strength unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
B. Remove defective concrete, ice, laitance, dirt, oil, grease, form release agents, paints, and other foreign material from concrete surfaces, which may affect the bond or performance of the grout by brushing, hammering, chipping, sand blasting or other similar dry mechanical means until sound and clean concrete surface is achieved. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance and firmly embedded into the parent concrete.
1. Ensure air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout are oil-less type or equipped with an oil trap in the airline to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface.
C. Roughen concrete lightly, but not to interfere with placement of grout.
D. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout.
E. Align, level, and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted.
F. Wash concrete surfaces clean and then keep moist for at least 24 hours prior to the placement of nonshrink cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a soaker hose, or flooding the surface or other method acceptable to Engineer. Upon completion of the 24 hour period, remove visible water from the surface prior to grouting.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
G. Nonshrink epoxy grouts do not require saturation of concrete substrate. Do not wet concrete surfaces to receive nonshrink epoxy grout. Completely dry surfaces in contact with epoxy grout before grouting.
H. Support equipment during alignment and installation of grout by shims, wedges, blocks, or other approved means. Prevent bond of shims, wedges and blocking devices by bond breaking coatings and remove after grouting unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Grout voids created by the removal of shims, wedges, and blocks.
I. Formwork:
1. Construct leakproof forms anchored and shored to withstand grout pressures.
2. Install formwork with clearances to permit proper placement of grout.
3.3 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these Specifications.
B. Provide staffing and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand.
C. Maintain temperatures of base plate, supporting concrete, and grout between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours after placement, until grout compressive strength reaches 1,000 psi or as recommended by grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Do not allow differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing period.
D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or temperature of materials in contact with the grout are outside of 40 to 90 degrees F range.
E. Install grout to preserve the isolation between elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or partial contraction joint.
F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, partial contraction and construction joints through the grout.
3.4 INSTALLATION – CEMENT GROUT
A. Mixing:
1. Use proportions of two parts sand and one part cement, measured by volume.
2. Prepare grout with water to obtain consistency to permit placing and packing.
3. Mix water and grout in two steps:
a. Premix using approximately 2/3 of water.
b. After partial mixing, add remaining water to bring mix to desired placement consistency and continue mixing two to three minutes.
4. Mix only quantities of grout capable of being placed within 30 minutes after mixing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
5. Do not add additional water after grout has been mixed.
6. Minimum Compressive Strength (ASTM C 579):
a. In 48 hours: 2,400 psi.
b. In 28 days 7,000 psi.
B. Placing:
1. Place grout material quickly and continuously.
2. Do not use pneumatic-pressure or dry-packing methods.
3. Apply grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air.
4. Do not vibrate placed grout mixture or permit placement if area is being vibrated by nearby equipment.
5. Thoroughly compact final installation and eliminate air pockets.
6. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grout has been placed.
C. Curing:
1. Prevent rapid loss of water from grout during first 48 hours by use of approved membrane curing compound or by using wet burlap bags, soaker hoses or ponding.
2. Immediately after placement, protect grout from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
3. After grout has attained its initial set, keep damp for minimum three days.
D. Reflect existing underlying expansion joints, partial contraction joints, and construction joints through the grout.
3.5 INSTALLATION – NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS
A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by Engineer.
B. Mix in a mortar mixer with moving blades. Pre-wet mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with minimum amount of water recommended by manufacturer and then add minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. Do not mix by hand.
C. Provide forms as specified in “Preparation” Article. Place grout into the designated areas and prevent segregation and entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. Fill all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces.
Provide grout holes and vent holes as necessary.
D. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place grout in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening.
E. Just before grout reaches its final set, cut back grout to the substrate at a 45-degree angle from lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise ordered and approved by Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float or brush finish.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Grouting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 036000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
F. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placement, until grout compressive strength reaches 1,000 psi or as recommended by manufacturer, whichever is longer. Saturate grout surface by use of saturated burlap bags, soaker hoses or ponding. Provide sunshades. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Use particular types of grout as follows:
1. Cement Grout: Use where indicated.
2. General Purpose Nonshrink Cementitious Grout (CRD-C621 Grade D): Use at locations where nonshrink grout is indicated, except for base plates greater in area than 3-feet wide by 3-feet long.
3. Flowable (precision) Nonshrink Cementitious Grout (CRD-C621 Grade B or C): Use under base plates greater in area than 3-feet wide by 3-feet. Use at locations indicated to receive flowable (precision) nonshrink grout. Flowable (precision), nonshrink, cementitious grout may be substituted for general purpose nonshrink cementitious grout.
END OF SECTION 036000
Division 04
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 040110 - MASONRY CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cleaning the following:
1. Unit masonry surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Very Low-Pressure Spray: Under 100 psi.
B. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
C. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
D. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to cleaning masonry including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Verify masonry-cleaning equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Materials, material application, and sequencing.
c. Cleaning program.
d. Coordination with building occupants.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Work Sequence: Perform masonry-cleaning work in the following sequence:
1. Remove plant growth.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2. Inspect for open mortar joints. Where repairs are required, delay further cleaning work until after repairs are completed, cured, and dried to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
3. Remove paint.
4. Clean masonry surfaces.
5. Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry, delay application of these chemicals until after cleaning.
B. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in masonry units according to masonry repair Sections. Patch holes in mortar joints according to masonry repointing Sections.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include material descriptions and application instructions.
2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For paint-remover manufacturer and chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For cleaning materials and methods.
C. Cleaning program.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paint-Remover Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factoryauthorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection, preconstruction product testing, and on-site assistance.
B. Chemical-Cleaner Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factoryauthorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection, preconstruction product testing, and on-site assistance.
C. Cleaning Program: Prepare a written cleaning program that describes cleaning process in detail, including materials, methods, and equipment to be used; protection of surrounding materials; and control of runoff during operations. Include provisions for supervising worker performance and preventing damage.
1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of cleaning work, add a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 3
100% Design Submittal
D. Mockups: Prepare mockups of cleaning on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Cleaning: Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. for each type of masonry and surface condition.
a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions. Do not test cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage one or more chemical-cleaner manufacturers to perform preconstruction testing on masonry surfaces.
1. Use test areas as indicated and representative of proposed materials and existing construction.
2. Propose changes to materials and methods to suit Project.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit masonry-cleaning work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.
B. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT REMOVERS
A. Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste or gel formulation, for removing paint from masonry; containing no methylene chloride.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.
b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.
c. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 4
100% Design Submittal
e. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
f. Shore Corporation.
2.2 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Water: Potable.
B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
C. Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.
b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.
c. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company. d. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.
e. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
f. Price Research, Ltd. dba Charles Paint Research.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, glazed masonry, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.
b. Price Research, Ltd. dba Charles Paint Research.
2.4 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS
A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Nonglazed Masonry: Dilute acidic cleaner with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
C. Acidic Cleaner for Nonglazed Masonry: Dilute acidic cleaner with water to concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage glazed or polished surface, but not greater than that recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 5
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent paint removers and chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist paint removers and chemical cleaners used unless products being used will not damage adjacent surfaces.
Use protective materials that are waterproof and UV resistant. Apply masking agents according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid strippable masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining.
2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of enough force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.
3. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes before disposal.
4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
B. Remove downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to immediate work area and store during masonry cleaning. Reinstall when masonry cleaning is complete.
1. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.
3.2 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Cleaning Appearance Standard: Cleaned surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 50 feet away by Engineer.
B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water do not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces.
C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1. Brushes: Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used.
2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage surfaces, including joints. a. Equip units with pressure gages.
b. For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with nozzle having a coneshaped spray. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 6
100% Design Submittal
c. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
d. For high-pressure water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees.
e. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. f. For steam application, use steam generator capable of delivering live steam at nozzle.
D. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.
E. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Cleaning Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas.
F. Water Application Methods:
1. Water-Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from masonry surface and apply water in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage.
G. Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces according to chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.
H. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed.
1. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between
6.7 and 7.5.
I. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks.
3.3 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing remaining growth to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and plant debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur.
B. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to planned cleaning methods. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 7
100% Design Submittal
1. Carefully remove heavy accumulations of rigid materials from masonry surface with sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface.
2. Remove paint and calking with paint remover.
a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Repeat application up to two times if needed.
3. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paste paint remover. a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. c. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. d. Repeat application if needed.
3.4 CLEANING MASONRY
A. Hot-Water Wash: Use hot water applied by low-pressure spray.
B. Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal:
1. Wet surface with hot water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray.
3. Scrub surface with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate fresh cleaner is used and that surface remains wet.
4. Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae remover and soil.
5. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup.
C. Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning:
1. Wet surface with hot water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply cleaner to surface in two applications by brush or low-pressure spray.
3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended in writing by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
4. Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil.
5. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. If additional cleaning is required, use steam cleaning.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage paint-remover manufacturer's and chemical-cleaner manufacturer's factory-authorized service representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection, to perform preconstruction product testing, and provide on-site assistance when requested by Engineer. Have chemical-cleaner manufacturer's factory-authorized service ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Masonry Cleaning
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 040110 - 8
100% Design Submittal
representatives visit Project site not less than twice to observing progress and quality of the work.
3.6 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces of spillage and debris. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
B. Remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts.
C. Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.
END OF SECTION 040110
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
3. Reinforcement.
4. Masonry-joint reinforcement.
5. Embedded flashing materials.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section:
1. Steel lintels and steel shelf angles in accordance with Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" in concrete unit masonry.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to surface of unit masonry assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
C. Exposed: Weather-exposed side of a constructed wall.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1. For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Lintel design and types required.
4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Smooth and Split-faced CMUs, in the form of small-scale units.
2. Pre-faced CMUs.
3. Colored mortar.
4. Weep holes/vents.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Exposed CMUs.
2. Pre-faced CMUs.
3. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties, material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs, if not surface treated.
3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.
4. Mortar admixtures.
5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
7. Reinforcing bars.
8. Joint reinforcement.
9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, in accordance with ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.
D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with TMS 402/602.
E. Weather Procedures:
1. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
2. Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Project team craftworkers of the Masonry Contractor assigned to Project will be required to have the International Masonry Institute - Flashing Training or equal and to provide evidence of certificate or a letter of the firm's commitment to enroll key project personnel in the training program prior to the start of Project.
B. Project team craftworkers of the Masonry Contractor assigned to Project will be required to have the International Masonry Institute - Grouting and Reinforcing Training or equal and to provide evidence of certificate or a letter of the firm's commitment to enroll key project personnel in the training program prior to the start of Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for testing indicated.
D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
2. Build sample panels facing south.
3. Where masonry is to match existing, build panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface.
4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.8 MOCKUPS
A. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as indicated on Drawings.
2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 72 inches long by 72 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup.
Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).
3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 5
100% Design Submittal
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 402/602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 402/602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Source Limitations for Integral Water Repellent: Obtain integral water-repellent units from CMU and mortar manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms accordance with ASTM C1314.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. TMS 402/602:
a. Maintain one copy of the standard in Project field office at all times during construction. Supervisory personnel are to be thoroughly familiar with this material as it applies to Project.
2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 402/602 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 ft. vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.
C. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
D. Building Lintels:
1. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. a. Knockout blocks will not be acceptable.
E. Integral Water Repellent: Surface-applied water repellent for exposed units.
1. Description: Liquid polymeric, water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with water repellent, when tested in accordance with ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 7
100% Design Submittal
ASTM E514/E514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Standard CMUs: Load-bearing ASTM C90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2000 psi.
2. Density Classification: Medium weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.
4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Engineer's sample.
B. Architectural CMUs: Load bearing, ASTM C90.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. York Building Products or equal.
2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 200 psi.
3. Density Classification: Medium weight.
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.
5. Pattern and Texture: To match existing adjacent.
6. Colors: To match existing adjacent.
7. Special Aggregate: Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in Engineer's sample.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Alkali content is not more than 0.1 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M.
E. Mortar Cement : ASTM C1329/C1329M.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 8
100% Design Submittal
G. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
2. Colored Masonry Cement:
3. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
4. Pigments does not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
5. Pigments does not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.
J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
K. Water-Repellent Mortar Admixture: Liquid water-repellent admixture added to mortar, intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
L. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors extend at least 1-1/2 inches into masonry but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 9
100% Design Submittal
1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/A82M, with ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/A82M, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating.
3. Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M, Type 304.
4. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M commercial steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating.
6. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. a. 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
E. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTMA 153/A153M.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 10
100% Design Submittal
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Masonry Cleaners:
1. Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 11
100% Design Submittal
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
1. Pigments does not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments does not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.
3. Mix to match Engineer's sample.
4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Architectural CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.
c. Acoustical CMUs.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Engineer's sample.
2. Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Architectural CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.
c. Acoustical CMUs.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 402/602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2500 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.
4. Minimum W/C ratio = 0.60.
G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Application: Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with pre-faced CMUs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 12
100% Design Submittal
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
D. Exposed Masonry: Mix units to product uniform blend of colors and textures.
E. Where existing masonry occurs, match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
F. Temperature Control: Perform temperature-sensitive construction procedures while masonry Work is progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 deg F.
1. 40 to 32 Deg F (4 to 0 Deg C):
a. Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 deg F.
b. Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures.
2. 32 to 25 Deg F (0 to Minus 4 Deg C):
a. Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F; maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. b. Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 deg F to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 deg F at end of workday.
3. Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160 deg F.
G. Masonry Protection: Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures.
1. 40 to 32 Deg F (4 to 0 Deg C): Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 13
100% Design Submittal
2. 32 to 25 Deg F (0 to Minus 4 Deg C): Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for at least 24 hours.
3. 25 to 20 Deg F (Minus 4 to 7 Deg C): Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours, 48 hours for grouted masonry.
4. 20 Deg F (Minus 7 Deg C) and Below: Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C) for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory.
For grouted masonry, maintain heated enclosure to 40 deg F for 48 hours.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2 inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2 inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2 inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft. or 1/2 inch maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 14
100% Design Submittal
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.
4. Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants, including acoustic sealants as applicable to materials, applications and Project conditions.
5. Penetration Firestopping: Install penetration firestopping systems for Project applications to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 15
100% Design Submittal
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Where applicable, set masonry trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.
2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
3. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.
D. Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
F. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 24 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 16
100% Design Submittal
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.
3.8 CONTROL JOINTS
A. General: Install control joint materials in CMUs as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Locate control joints. See Drawings.
C. Form control joints in CMUs as follows:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.
Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Install lintels over openings as indicated.
B. Provide concrete or formed-in-place masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install loose steel over openings as follows:
1. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lintels at Fire-Rated Openings: Provide fire-rated masonry required or steel lintels with applied fireproofing in thickness required to maintain fire rating of wall or partition rating. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 17
100% Design Submittal
3.10 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall where indicated.
B. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 402/602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 402/602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 48 inches.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements is done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Refer to structural Drawings.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces, grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 18
100% Design Submittal
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, in accordance with ASTM C140 for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, in accordance with ASTM C780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, in accordance with ASTM C780.
Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, in accordance with ASTM C1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, in accordance with ASTM C1314 at 7 days and at 28 days.
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as Work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid-strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 08- 04A.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 19
100% Design Submittal
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.
D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 042200
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Concrete Unit Masonry Renovation & Expansion Final Design 042200 - 20
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 05
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 050519 - POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS AND REINFORCING BARS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Post-installed adhesive and expansion anchors for concrete and concrete masonry unit substrates.
2. Post-installed reinforcing bar dowels using adhesive anchoring system.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete” and related Sections for concrete, reinforcement, and accessories.
2. Section 042200 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for concrete masonry units and accessories.
3. Various Sections in Division 05 related to metals.
4. Various Sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, and 28 related to facility utilities.
5. Various Sections in Divisions 40, 41, 43, 44, and 46 related to process mechanical equipment.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to post-installed anchors including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Verify specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. c. Temperature, humidity & moisture limitations for adhesive anchoring system. d. Manufacturer’s instructions for installation of expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system.
e. Quality-control program.
f. Coordination with building occupants.
2. Attendees:
a. Owner or Owner’s Representative.
b. Resident Engineer.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 2
100% Design Submittal
c. Contractor.
d. Engineer.
e. Manufacturer Representative.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Post-Installed Expansion Anchors:
1. Design Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics for expansion anchors.
2. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, materials and finishes for post-installed expansion anchors installed into cracked concrete or masonry.
3. Installation Procedures: Submit procedures stating product proposed for use, and complete installation method.
B. Post-Installed Adhesive Anchoring System:
1. Design Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics, including temperature, humidity, and moisture limitations for adhesive anchoring system.
2. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, materials and finishes for post-installed adhesive anchoring system installed into cracked concrete or masonry.
3. Installation Procedures: Submit procedures stating method of drilling, product proposed for use, and complete installation method.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installation procedure: Submit installation procedure for post-installed adhesive anchoring system; including method of drilling.
B. Certificates:
1. Installer Qualifications for Adhesive Anchoring System: Submit installer and testing agency qualifications as stated in following Paragraph of this Article.
2. Submit current International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Service Reports (ESR) or IAPMO-UES (ER) Report for expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system, for installation into cracked concrete or masonry, as applicable, indicating conformance with current ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Acceptance Criteria.
3. City of Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety (LADBS) compliance for expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system, for installation into cracked concrete or masonry, as applicable.
4. Seismic Qualification Certificates for Post-installed Concrete Anchors.
C. Qualification Data:
1. Installer: Indicate manufacturer’s training date and a list of personnel trained on installation of adhesive anchoring system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2. Testing Agency:
a. Laboratory: Meet requirements of ASTM E329. Prior to testing, submit qualifications of proposed testing laboratory for approval that includes:
1) Name and address.
2) Names and positions of principal officers and name, position, and qualifications of responsible registered professional engineer in charge. 3) List technical services provided, indicating external technical services to be provided by other organizations.
4) Names and qualifications of the supervising laboratory technicians. 5) Provide report prepared by laboratory evaluations authority when requested by Engineer.
6) Submit as required above for other organizations that will provide external technical services.
b. Include in submittal a list of five projects in which the testing agency has performed testing in accordance with ASTM E488. Include following information for each project:
1) Project name and location.
2) Project Owner.
3) Owner’s representative including address and phone number. 4) Brief description of work.
3. Submit qualifications of other laboratory or laboratories until approved.
D. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES or IAPMO-UES for expansion anchors and adhesive anchoring system, for installation of post-installed anchors into cracked concrete or concrete masonry unit, as applicable, indicating conformance with current ICC ES Acceptance Criteria.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Coordinate with the work of other Sections, field verifying dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work before installing items specified in this Section.
B. Adhesive Anchoring System:
1. Installer Training: Conduct thorough training by the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative. Training shall consist of the complete installation process for postinstalled anchors and reinforcing bar dowels, including but not limited to:
a. Tool selection.
b. Hole drilling procedure.
c. Hole preparation and cleaning techniques.
d. Adhesive injection technique and dispenser training and maintenance. e. Anchor preparation and installation.
f. Reinforcing bar dowels preparation and installation. g. Proof loading and torqueing.
h. Temperature, humidity, and moisture limitations.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 4
100% Design Submittal
i. Working time limitations.
j. Setting time.
2. Where indicated on plans include training for anchors and reinforcing bar dowels installed horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads. Install horizontally or upwardly inclined anchors and reinforcing bar dowels by personnel letter by an applicable training program. Certification shall include written and performance tests in accordance with the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent as preapproved by Engineer of Record.
3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Training: Submit upon completion of training, for the post-installed anchors and reinforcing bar dowels, including non-production and production anchors, and reinforcing bar dowels.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation.
B. Handle materials with cranes or derricks. Do not dump material off transportation vehicles or handle in ways that will cause damage.
C. Store materials elevated above grade and block up so they will not become bent or otherwise damaged.
D. Repair items that have become damage or corroded to satisfaction of Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION ANCHORS
A. Fastening to Concrete Substrate: Zinc plated carbon steel wedge type anchors, complete with zinc plated nuts and washers, unless otherwise noted.
B. Submerged or Weather Exposed Substrates: ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel wedge type anchors, complete with Type 316 stainless steel nuts and washers, unless otherwise noted.
C. Meet ICC ES AC01 or ICC ES AC193 cracked concrete qualifications.
D. Length: When length or anchor embedment is not indicated, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion cone portion of the anchor at least 1 inch behind concrete reinforcing steel.
E. Basis-of-Design:
1. Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti, Kwik-Bolt TZ, unless otherwise noted.
2. Acceptable Anchors: Hilti Kwik-Bolt TZ; Simpson Strong-Tie Strong Bolt 2 Wedge Anchor; DeWalt Power-Stud+; or equal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.2 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM
A. Fastening to Concrete Substrate: Manufactured system consisting of post installed threaded rods, nuts, washers, other anchoring hardware, and chemical dispenser for installation in hammer drilled holes.
1. Anchors: Meet ICC ES AC308 cracked concrete qualifications.
2. Injection Adhesive: Two-component epoxy system consisting of a hardener and a resin, furnished in pre-measured side-by-side cartridges which keep both components separate.
3. Adhesive Cartridge: Side-by-side design to accept a static mixing nozzle which thoroughly blends both components and allows injection directly into a drilled hole.
4. Anchor: Zinc plated carbon steel or Type 316 stainless steel as indicated consisting of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer, of matching material to anchor rod. a. Basis-of-Design:
1) Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3, unless otherwise noted.
2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3; Simpson Strong Tie SET-3G; or equal.
5. Reinforcing Bar Dowels: Reinforcing bar, per Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-inPlace Concrete.” a. Basis-of-Design:
1) Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3, unless otherwise noted.
2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti HIT- RE 500 V3; Simpson Strong Tie Set3G; or equal.
B. Fastening to Hollow Concrete Block, Brick, or Hollow-Core Precast Concrete Planks: Threepart threaded rod, screen tube, and chemical dispenser anchoring system.
1. Anchors: Meet ICC ES AC58.
2. Adhesive Cartridges: Contain pre-measured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser.
3. Anchor: Zinc plated carbon steel or Type 316 stainless steel as indicated consisting of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer, of matching material to anchor rod.
4. Reinforcing Bar Dowel: Reinforcing bar, per Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-inPlace Concrete.”
5. Basis-of-Design:
a. Anchorage designs indicated are based on Hilti HIT HY-70 System, Simpson Strong-Tie ET-3G, unless otherwise noted; or equal.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance: design anchors and reinforcing bar dowel anchorage for all anticipated loads and load combinations per ASCE/SEI 7 including omega-naught (Ωo) factors as applicable.. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Seismic Performance: post-installed concrete anchors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Term "withstand" means "the unit system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit system will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Component Importance Factor is (IP):
a. Component Importance Factor (IP) = 1.0 for all components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install anchoring system in strict compliance with manufacturer's published installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Comply with recommended surface preparation, temperature, and moisture of substrate and ambient conditions.
2. Coordinate installation with Special Inspector.
3. Use drill bit of correct diameter and drill to required depth using rotary impact type hammer drills with carbide-tipped bits.
4. Drill holes perpendicular to concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Use oil free compressed air to blast out loose particles and dust from drilled holes.
B. Expansion anchors:
1. Check expansion anchors for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation.
C. Adhesive anchoring system:
1. Perform installation only by personnel trained in anchor installation and having certification required in PART 1 - GENERAL.
2. Inject adhesive and install anchors or reinforcing bar dowels that are clean and free of dirt, oil, grease, ice, or other deleterious material which would reduce bond.
3.2 3.2 REPAIRS
A. At testing completion, repair damaged concrete, post-installed anchors, reinforcing bar dowels and other damaged construction as required to match conditions prior to testing.
B. Repair in accordance with provisions of Section 030130.71 “Modifications to Existing Concrete” concrete damaged by testing as directed by Engineer, including but not limited to:
1. Saw cutting and removal of damaged, loose, or unsound concrete.
2. Removal of damaged anchors or reinforcing bar dowels.
3. Cleaning and preparing concrete surface and reinforcing bar dowels.
4. Place new repair material.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 7
100% Design Submittal
5. Install new anchors or reinforcing bar dowels to replace anchors or reinforcing bar dowels that are found to be unacceptable or deficient.
6. Perform repairs at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION 050519
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars Renovation & Expansion Final Design 050519 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. K-series steel joists.
2. K-series steel joist substitutes.
3. Joist accessories.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033010 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.
2. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.
3. Section 053100 “Steel Decking” for steel decking installed on steel joist framing.
4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrication” for miscellaneous metal items installed as part of the steel joist framing work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B. Design calculations: For all joists.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.
2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
4. Materials and details of construction of all members, including camber.
5. Erection marks. Mark each field piece to correspond to the shop drawings.
6. Size and length of all field welds to supports.
7. Uniform, concentrated and varying loads used to design the joists indicated on the Drawings.
8. Drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of California.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer professional engineer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Manufacturer certificates.
D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, registered in the state where the project will be constructed, responsible for its preparation.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Certification from the Steel Joist Institute showing that the manufacturer's products conform to the Institute's standards and load tables for the type of member provided.
H. Electrode manufacturer's data for actual electrodes proposed. Data includes manufacturer's recommended welding parameters for each electrode to be used.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Furnish steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining the work of this Section before installation of the items specified.
B. Coordinate locations of openings and weight of equipment mounted on steel joists.
C. Provide steel framing around openings and miscellaneous steel to erect the joists.
D. Provide additional web members at all concentrated loads not occurring at panel points.
E. The Drawings indicate loads applied to special joists. Locations and loads indicated on the Drawings for equipment and appurtenances supported by special joists are approximate.
Coordinate with the manufacturer(s) of the approved equipment and appurtenances to obtain the actual locations and operating loads for the design of special joists. Design joists using load combinations prescribed in the design code indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Canam Buildings US Inc.; Canam Group Inc.
2. Gooder-Henrichsen Co.
3. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
4. Valley Joist.
5. Vulcraft/Verco Group; a division of Nucor Corp.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.
1. Use ASD; data are given at strength-load level.
2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the following:
a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.3 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F. Provide additional accessories where indicated on Drawings:
1. Ceiling extensions.
2. Bottom chord extensions.
3. Headers.
G. Do not camber joists.
H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
B. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging to brace bottom chords against lateral movement under the net wind uplift pressure indicated on the Drawings. Connect all bridging to end walls unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
C. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
D. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."
E. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
F. High strength steel bolts to conform to ASTM F3125 Type A325 and are mechanically galvanized in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 50, Type II.
1. Finish: Plain.
G. Welding Electrodes: E70XX. Comply with AWS standards.
H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
I. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.
D. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," as indicated joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high strength steel bolts.
E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
F. Weld or bolt bridging to joists and structural steel as shown on the Drawings. Bridging and completely install bridging anchors before construction loads are placed on the steel joists G. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
H. Do not attach supports or braces for equipment, piping, conduits, ductwork, or other utilities to steel joists, bridging, or accessories unless the steel joists have been designed and fabricated to support all loads due to the equipment, piping, conduits, ductwork, or other utilities.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165/E 165M.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.
C. Visually inspect bolted connections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
END OF SECTION 052100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Joist Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 052100 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof deck.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.
2. Various Sections in Division 07 for insulation and roofing systems applied over steel decking.
3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.
4. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details such as fastener types and sizes, weld types and sizes, and layout patterns, reinforcing channels, cut deck openings, special jointing, closures, cant strips, cover plates accessories, and attachments to other construction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's load table including design thickness in inches and section properties, gravity load carrying capability at the span used, and diaphragm shear capacity.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
D. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:
1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
E. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1. Perform by certified welders and in accordance with AISI SG-673 standard.
C. Electrode manufacturer's data for actual electrodes proposed. Data includes manufacturer's recommended welding parameters for each electrode to be used.
D. Electrical Raceway Units: Provide UL-labeled cellular floor-deck units complying with UL 209 and listed in UL's "Electrical Construction Equipment Directory" for use with standard header ducts and outlets for electrical distribution systems.
E. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
F. Certification from the Steel Deck Institute (SDI) that the steel roof deck is designed in accordance with the SDI.
G. Conform to requirements of SDI Standard Specifications for steel roof deck.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, AISI, and ‘North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members’, and with the following:
1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thicknesses; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated.
6. Span Condition: Double span.
7. Side Laps: Nestable Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Closures,,, Cover Plates and: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.
H. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
I. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.
J. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factorypunched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
K. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
L. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch-wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.
M. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
N. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: Per drawings.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units per drawings. Space welds 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 as indicated.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 12 inches, and as follows:
1. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner.
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten.
E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, cover plates, cant strips and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Steel Decking
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 053100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.
Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation and apply repair paint.
1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.
2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
END OF SECTION 053100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard, nonstructural metal framing.
2. Ceiling joist framing.
3. Soffit framing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold-formed metal framing.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaftwall assemblies, with height limitations.
3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1. Steel sheet.
2. Expansion anchors.
3. Power-actuated anchors.
4. Mechanical fasteners.
5. Vertical deflection clips.
6. Horizontal drift deflection clips
7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
D. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
2. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
3. CRACO Mfg., Inc.
4. ClarkDietrich.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
6. Design Shapes in Steel.
7. Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
8. Jaimes Industries, Inc.
9. MBA Metal Framing.
10. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
11. Marino\WARE.
12. Mill Steel Framing; Mill Steel Company.
13. Olmar Supply, Inc.
14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
15. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company; Stone Group of Companies.
16. State Building Products, Inc.
17. Steel Construction Systems; Stone Group of Companies.
18. Steel Network, Inc. (The).
19. Steeler, Inc.
20. Super Stud Building Products Inc.
21. TELLING Industries.
22. The Mill Steel Co.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design cold-formed steel framing.
1. Include loads as applicable for the project including but not limited to the following:
a. Dead Loads: for weights of materials and construction. b. Wind Loads: Per Specification 018839.
c. Seismic Loads: Per Specification 018829.
B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:
a. Interior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft..
b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span.
3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch.
5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing complies with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following:
1. Wall Studs: AISI S211.
2. Headers: AISI S212.
3. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G60, A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZM150), or GF30 (ZGF90).
B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance.
2. Coating: G60.
2.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 5
100% Design Submittal
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
b. CRACO Mfg., Inc.
c. ClarkDietrich.
d. Marino\WARE.
e. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company; Stone Group of Companies. f. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
g. Steeler, Inc.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
b. Flange Width: 2 inch equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1 inch.
F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
G. Steel Single- or Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Top Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.
2.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING
A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Anchor clips.
5. End clips.
6. Foundation clips.
7. Gusset plates.
8. Stud kickers and knee braces.
9. Joist hangers and end closures.
10. Hole-reinforcing plates.
11. Backer plates.
2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, carbon-steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with design capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICCES AC01 ICC-ES AC193 ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure.
2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor or adhesive anchor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with design capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.
D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.
E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error not to exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fireresistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 9
100% Design Submittal
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.
1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.
F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.
3.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 10
100% Design Submittal
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure.
4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.
2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers.
G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:
1. Joist Spacing: 16 inches.
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers, consisting of joist and joist track or another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 11
100% Design Submittal
1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:
1. Joist-Track Solid Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs.
2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated, and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.
H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error not to exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.
D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Cold-Formed Metal Framing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 054000 - 12
100% Design Submittal
END OF SECTION 054000
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.
2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.
4. Steel beams.
5. Steel angles.
6. Steel lintels.
7. Steel support brackets.
8. Steel base plates for other than structural steel or equipment.
9. Steel closure plates.
10. Steel splice plates.
11. Steel subframing at roof openings.
12. Shelf angles.
13. Miscellaneous items fabricated from steel aluminum or stainless steel.
14. Metal ladders.
15. Fall Prevention Systems Ladder safety cages.
16. Metal crossovers.
17. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards steel edgings.
18. Downspout guards.
19. Metal downspout boots.
20. Delegated design.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033010 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
2. Section 036000 “Grouting” for non-shrink grout.
3. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.
4. Section 050519 “Post-Installed Anchors and Reinforcing Bars” for anchors in various substrates.
5. Various Sections in Divisions 40 - 46 for process mechanical work scopes.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Prefabricated building columns.
3. Metal nosings and treads.
4. Paint products.
B. Samples:
1. Submit 2 inches by 2 inches samples of cover plates, illustrating surface finish, color, texture and jointing details.
2. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during construction.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.
2. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.
5. Shelf angles.
6. Metal ladders.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
7. Fall Prevention System Ladder safety cages.
8. Metal crossovers.
9. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards steel edgings.
10. Downspout guards.
11. Metal downspout boots.
12. Loose steel lintels.
13. Miscellaneous steel items.
14. Miscellaneous aluminum items.
15. Miscellaneous stainless-steel items.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded cover plate.
1.5 DELEGATED-DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. For ladders, step-overs, and platforms, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Mill Certificates: Signed by aluminum, steel and stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Certify that welders have been qualified under AWS, within previous 12 months, to perform welds required under this Section.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the State of Project location.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless steel." D. Evaluation Reports: Post-installed concrete anchors, from ICC-ES for expansion anchors and adhesive anchor system, for installation into cracked concrete or unit masonry, as applicable, indicating conformance with current ICC ES Acceptance Criteria. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Ensure aluminum ladders withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
C. Structural Performance of platforms and step-overs: Withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above.
5. Seismic and wind loads per specifications 018829 and 018839.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Wide Flange Shapes:ASTM A992.
C. Steel Other Shapes, Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
D. Stainless steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316 Type 316L for welded components.
E. Stainless steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316 Type 316L for welded components.
F. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 5
100% Design Submittal
G. Rolled-Stainless Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793.
H. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. IKG.
b. Ohio Gratings, Inc.
c. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, division of Traction Technologies Holdings, LLC.
I. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed steel tubing.
J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type S Grade B Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
K. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A741.
1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.
L. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A1008/A1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966- inch minimum thickness; unfinished.
M. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Aluminum Extruded Pipe: ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6 and Alloy 6061 T6 as indicated.
O. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.
P. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6.
Q. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
R. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
S. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
T. Bronze Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass).
U. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B151/B151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
V. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze).
W. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 35.
X. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.
Y. Stainless steel Bolts: ASTM F593, Type 316.
Z. Stainless steel Nuts: ASTM F594, Type 316.
AA. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip galvanized nuts and washers where noted)
BB. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and washers: ASTM F3125, Grade A325 (mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50, where noted).
1. Elevated Temperature Exposure: Type I.
2. General Application: Type I or Type II.
CC. Galvanizing: ASTM A123, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni.
DD. Galvanizing, hardware: ASTM A153, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni.
EE. Galvanizing, anchor bolts: ASTM F2329, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni.
FF. Welding electrodes, steel: AWS A5.1 E70xx.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Unless otherwise noted, provide steel machine bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron; galvanized steel or stainless-steel machine bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron; and stainless steel machine bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel.
B. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Mechanically Galvanized Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
E. Stainless steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593; with hex nuts, ASTM F594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Provide standard headed bolts with heavy hex nuts and Grade A washers.
2. Where galvanized anchor bolts are indicated or specified, provide standard headed bolts with heavy hex nuts and Grade A washers, galvanize in accordance with ASTM F2329.
G. Automatic End Welded Headed Anchor Studs and Flux Ended Studs: Cold drawn steel, ASTM A108,.
1. Basis-of-Design - Headed Anchor Studs as Manufactured by Nelson or equal: H4L Headed Concrete Anchors.
H. Machine bolts and nuts conforming to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and nuts:
hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances: Type 316 stainless steel.
I. Toggle Bolts: Hilti, Toggler Bolt or equal.
J. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
L. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM
A. Miscellaneous Aluminum: Formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Drill or punch holes. Smooth edges without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.
B. Connections and Accessories: Sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Close fitting exposed joints and jointed where least conspicuous.
Conceal threads on threaded connections where practical. Provide continuous welds or intermittent welds on welded connections as specified or shown. Dress face of welds flush and smooth. Weld on unexposed side as much as possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration of the aluminum exposed surface. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
C. Miscellaneous Aluminum Items: Beams, angles, closure angles, grates, floor plates, stop plates, stair nosings, and other miscellaneous aluminum indicated and not otherwise specified.
D. Angle Frames for Roof Hatches, Beams, Grates, and Similar Items: Complete with welded strap anchors attached.
E. Stair Treads for Aluminum Stairs: As specified for grating and having cast abrasive non-slip nosing as approved.
F. Aluminum Nosing at Concrete Stairs: Furnish with wing type anchors and flat head stainless steel machine screws, 12 inches on center. Provide nosing at concrete ladder openings. Single piece nosing for each step extending to within full ladder width. Set nosing flush with stair tread finish at concrete stairs. Furnish treads with heavy duty protective tape cover.
1. Basis-of-Design: Wooster Products, Inc.; Alumogrit Treads, Type 116; similar by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco or equal.
G. Aluminum Finishes:
1. Anodized Finish: Give an anodic oxide treatment in accordance with AA M31C22A41.
2. Mill Finish: Have a cleaned and degreased mill finish on other aluminum items.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
A. Miscellaneous Steel Work: Formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Drill or punch holes. Smooth edges without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.
B. Connections and Accessories: Sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Close fitting exposed joints and jointed where least conspicuous.
Conceal thread on threaded connections where practical. Provide continuous welds or intermittent welds on welded connections as specified or shown. Dress face of welds flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.
C. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Beams, angles, lintels, metal stairs detailed on the Drawings, support brackets, base plates for other than structural steel or equipment, closure angles, bridge crane rails, monorail hoist beams, holddown straps and lugs, door frames, splice plates, subframing at roof openings and any other miscellaneous steel indicated and not otherwise specified.
D. Structural steel angle and channel door frames: Galvanized. Fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb.
E. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments and other functions: Schedule 40 pipe unless otherwise indicated. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe: Provide welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length.
F. Lintels, relief angles or other steel supporting masonry or embedded in masonry: Galvanized. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 9
100% Design Submittal
G. Steel Finish Work: Thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter. Provide one shop coat of primer compatible with finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Omit paint within 3 inches of proposed field welds. Apply paint to dry surfaces and be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces.
H. Galvanizing, where required: Use hot-dip zinc process after fabrication, coating not less than 2 oz/sq. ft. of surface.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL
A. Miscellaneous Stainless Steel Work: Formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Drill or punch holes. Smooth edges without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.
B. Connections and accessories: Sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Close fitting exposed joints, jointed where least conspicuous.
Conceal threads on threaded connections where practical. Provide continuous welds or intermittent welds on welded connections as specified or shown. Dress face of welds flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.
C. Beams, angles, bar racks, and other miscellaneous stainless steel.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 Interior Painting."
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
C. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.
D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 10
100% Design Submittal
2.8 CASTINGS:
A. General: Good quality, strong, tough, even-grained, smooth, free from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and other defects. Thoroughly clean castings to remove foreign matter, and deleterious films. Castings will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field by the Engineer. Damaged castings may be rejected and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
B. Matching Surfaces: Machine to a true plane surface allowing contact surfaces to seat without rocking. Provide allowances in patterns so specified thickness is not reduced to obtain finished surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if actual weight is less than 95 percent of theoretical weight computed from dimensions. Provide facilities for weighing castings in the presence of the Engineer.
2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 11
100% Design Submittal
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/4 by 1 inch, with a minimum 6 inch embedment and 1 1/2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated.
1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24 inches o.c.
E. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-inch top plates.
F. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
G. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.11 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 12
100% Design Submittal
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.
C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete.
2.12 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 16 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 1-inch-diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) IKG.
2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, division of Traction Technologies Holdings, LLC.
7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.
9. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets.
10. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
C. Aluminum Ladders:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Halliday Products.
b. Kattsafe.
c. O'Keeffe's Inc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 13
100% Design Submittal
d. Precision Ladders, LLC.
e. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc.
f. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
g. UPNOVR, Inc.
2. Space siderails minimum 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Siderails: Continuous aluminum bars 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch.
4. Rungs: Solid extruded-aluminum tubes, 3/4 inch diameter.
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten as indicated.
6. Wall Support Brackets: Aluminum 6061-T6 spaced 4 feet on center with Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. Fasten side rails to floor with 1/2 inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel expansion anchors.
7. Platforms: Fabricate from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating or extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.
9. Provide minimum 72-inch-high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at foot of ladder to prevent unauthorized ladder use.
D. Stainless steel Ladders:
1. Material: Fabricate from Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Siderails: Continuous 2-3/8-by-2-inch tube, spaced at minimum of 18 inches unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter stainless steel rods spaced 12-in on center. a. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten as indicated.
4. Wall Support Brackets: Type 316 stainless steel spaced 4 feet on center with Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. Fasten side rails to floor with 1/2 inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel expansion anchors.
5. Platforms: Fabricate from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating, supported by extrudedaluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
2.13 LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A. Construct as indicated using aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel.
2.14 LADDER SAFETY SYSTEM
A. Provide a ladder safety system at each ladder more than 20 feet high and as indicated.
1. Provide an aluminum or stainless steel vertical rigid rail, rail brackets for continuous travel, rail extension, stainless steel mounting hardware and fasteners, two non-corrosive metal sliding fall prevention devices, two full body harnesses with "D" rings, accessories and other materials required for complete installation and operation of ladder safety system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 14
100% Design Submittal
2. Provide 36 inch minimum height permanent aluminum or stainless-steel rail extension compatible with sliding fall prevention device to ensure worker is attached to ladder safety system while mounting and dismounting from a platform or landing. Provide removable ladder extensions at manholes, hatches, and roof scuttles. Provide stainless steel hardware and fasteners, accessories, and other materials required for complete installation to ladders in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide alignment between successive pieces of rail. Provide allowance for expansion and contraction on long runs.
4. In addition to "D" ring used for attachment to sliding fall prevention device, provide harnesses with at least two "D" rings for attachment of safety straps and lanyards.
5. Attach ladder safety system to installed ladders. Provide sliding fall prevention device allowing worker to climb up and down using both hands and move freely up and down the rail with worker in normal climbing position. Do not allow connection between sliding fall prevention device and harness attachment point to exceed 9 inches. Fabricate ladder safety system to stop the fall of a worker independently from offset ladders, platforms, or safety cages.
6. Conform to OSHA Regulation 1910.21 for ladder safety system. Rope or cable systems will not be allowed.
7. Basis-of-Design - Ladder Safety System: Saf-T-Climb by Honeywell International Inc.; Railok 90 by 3M Fall Protection; GlideLoc System by Honeywell International Inc.; or equal.
8. Provide ladder safety post extensions on fixed ladders 20 feet or less in height located below hatches and roof scuttles and as indicated. Locking aluminum telescoping safety post extension in its vertical position and extend a minimum of 36-in above opening and be secured to ladder rungs with stainless steel fasteners and brackets. a. Basis-of-Design: Ladder UP Safety Post, Model LU-4 by Bilco Co.; Series L1E Safety Extension by Halliday Products; or equal.
9. Ladder Shields: Mount 7 feet above finish grade
a. Basis-of-Design: Lad-Saf Ladder Gate by 3M Fall Protection; or equal.
2.15 COVER PLATE
A. Fabricate aluminum diamond plate and floor plate having a minimum thickness of 3/8 inch.
Fabricate frames and supports of aluminum construction. Furnish Type 316 stainless-steel fastening devices and hardware. Provide plates with a mill finish.
B. Provide aluminum angle supports as indicated.
C. Include aluminum angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
D. Provide flush stainless-steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each section.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 15
100% Design Submittal
2.16 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS
A. Fabricate from 3/16-inch rolled-steel floor plate with four 1-inch-diameter holes for water drainage and for lifting.
B. Fabricate from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
C. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
2.17 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
C. Galvanize and prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.18 DOWNSPOUT GUARDS
A. Fabricate downspout guards from 3/8-inch-thick by 12-inch-wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts.
B. Galvanize and prime downspout guards.
C. Prime downspout guards with zinc-rich primer.
2.19 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
A. Provide downspout boots made from cast aluminum in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor bolts.
1. Outlet: At 35 degrees from horizontal, to discharge onto splash block or pavement.
B. Prime cast-iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 16
100% Design Submittal
2.20 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.21 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and or shapes and plates of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings of 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.22 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.23 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
2.24 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. Limit maximum nickel (Ni) content of galvanizing zinc to 0.05%.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 17
100% Design Submittal
C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.25 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.
B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete or other masonry which are installed under Division 03 and Division 04 respectively. Install items to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be permitted.
1. Touch up abrasions in the shop primer immediately after erection. Paint areas left unprimed for welding after welding.
2. Clean and repair, after installation, zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged. Thoroughly clean damaged area and remove all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating prior to painting. Paint the cleaned area per the requirements of ASTM A780.
3. Install specialty products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Weld headed anchor studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 18
100% Design Submittal
6. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
7. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
8. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
9. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
10. Remove welding flux immediately.
11. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
12. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
13. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
14. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and steel that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
a. Aluminum Contacting a Dissimilar Metal: Apply a heavy brush coat of zincchromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal.
b. Aluminum Contacting Masonry or Concrete: Apply a heavy coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the masonry or concrete.
c. Aluminum Contacting Wood: Apply two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the wood.
d. Steel Contacting Exposed Concrete or Masonry: Apply heavy bitumastic troweling mastic.
e. Between aluminum stair treads, and steel supports, insert 1/4 inch thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 19
100% Design Submittal
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 055000
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Fabrications Renovation & Expansion Final Design 055000 - 20
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 06
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood products.
2. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.
C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM D5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates:
1. For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content:
1. Boards: 15 percent.
2. Dimension Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use categories as follows:
1. UC2: Interior construction not in contact with ground but may be subject to moisture.
Include all rough carpentry.
2. UC3B (Commodity Specification A): Uncoated sawn products in exterior construction not in contact with ground, exposed to all weather cycles including intermittent wetting but with sufficient air circulation for wood to dry. Excludes sawn products not in contact with ground but with ground contact-type hazards. Include all rough carpentry. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
3. UC4A (Commodity Specification A): Non-critical sawn products in contact with ground and exposed to all weather cycles including continuous or prolonged wetting, and sawn products not in contact with ground but with ground contact-type hazards or that are critical or hard to replace. Include all rough carpentry.
B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations are not to require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
D. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
E. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED LUMBER
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials are to comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Treatment is not to promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Exterior Type: Treated materials are to comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering in accordance with ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials are to have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative humidity.
Use where exterior type is not indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber is to be tested according to ASTM D5664 and design value adjustment factors are to be calculated according to ASTM D6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency and other information required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency.
E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations are not to bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed blocking.
2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing.
3. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
C. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Fasteners are to be of size and type indicated and comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 as appropriate for the substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.
F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
H. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.
I. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
K. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.10.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).
2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings.
3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
M. Securely attach roofing nailers to substrates by anchoring and fastening to withstand bending, shear, or other stresses imparted by Project wind loads and fastener-resistance loads as designed in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach wood blocking to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Attach wood roofing nailers securely to substrate to resist the designed outward and upward wind loads indicated on Drawings and in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ED-1, Tables A6 and A7.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061000
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Rough Carpentry
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 061000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
2. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Show large-scale details.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 2
100% Design Submittal
3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets.
5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Plastic Laminates: 12 by 12 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.
a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge.
2. Corner Pieces:
a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails and at exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
3. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.
2. High-pressure decorative laminate.
3. Adhesives.
C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program.
D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 3
100% Design Submittal
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of typical architectural cabinets as shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wetwork is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Albet Laminati.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Lamin-Art, Inc.
d. Wilsonart LLC.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Edges: Grade HGS.
5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS .
a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 5
100% Design Submittal
I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Engineer from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. c. Wood grains, matte finish.
d. Patterns, matte finish.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Doug Mockett.
b. Accuride International.
c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
d. CompX International, Inc.
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B02011.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 6
100% Design Submittal
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, Basis of design Mockett DP3C Type, Satin Chrome, 1 1/4 inch length, edge mounted Flat angled pull with 1/4” inch dia. Ridge. US26D Finish.
E. Catches: Magnetic catches, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
G. Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
H. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer. a. Type: Full extension.
b. Material: Epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers.
2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-platedsteel ball-bearing slides.
3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2.
4. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.
5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD100.
6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1.
7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage: 1-1/4-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Color: White.
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: ANSI/BHMA 613 for bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 640 for steel base; match Engineer's sample.
2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: ANSI/BHMA 605 for brass base; ANSI/BHMA 632 for steel base.
3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: ANSI/BHMA 723 for brass base; ANSI/BHMA 729 for zinc-coated-steel base.
4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: ANSI/BHMA 610 for brass base; ANSI/BHMA 636 for steel base.
5. Satin Chromium Plated: ANSI/BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 652 for steel base.
6. Bright Chromium Plated: ANSI/BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 651 for steel base.
7. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 7
100% Design Submittal
K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
D. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual."
1. For glass in frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2. For exposed glass edges, polish and grind smooth.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Renovation & Expansion Final Design 064116 - 8
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesusing concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 064116
Division 07
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 070150.19 - PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Work of This Section Includes:
1. Full roof tear-off.
2. Roof re-cover preparation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01110 "Coordination of Work" for use of premises and for phasing requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPS: Molded (expanded) polystyrene.
B. Full Roof Tear-off: Removal of existing roofing system down to existing roof deck.
C. OSB: Oriented strand board.
D. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.
E. Roof Re-Cover Preparation: Existing roofing system is to remain and be prepared for new roof installed over it.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting removal Work, conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roofmounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing tear-off, including, but not limited to, the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 2
100% Design Submittal
a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to remain.
c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and roofdrain plugging and plug removal. d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
e. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse.
f. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing. g. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect reroofing. h. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes.
i. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. j. Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials. k. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
l. Existing conditions that may require Engineer notification before proceeding.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1. Include certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor of existing roofing system.
B. Field Test Reports: Fastener pull-out test report.
C. Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations.
1. Submit before Work begins.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certified statement from manufacturer for existing warranted roof system stating that existing roof warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing removal.
2. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Roofing System:Membrane roofing.
B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area.
1. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted.
2. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' written notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.
3. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner has adequate advance notice to place protective dust and water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below work area.
4. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below affected area.
a. Verify that occupants below work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over impaired deck area.
C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.
D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
1. Construction Drawings and Project Manual for existing roofing system are provided for Contractor's convenience and information, but they are not a warranty of existing conditions. They are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Contractor's own investigations. Contractor is responsible for conclusions derived from existing documents.
F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building.
1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day.
G. Hazardous Materials:
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Engineer and Owner.
a. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty issued by manufacturer for existing warranted roof system.
1. Notify warrantor before proceeding with the Work.
2. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of reroofing, and obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect.
a. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS
A. EPS Insulation: ASTM C578.
B. Plywood: DOC PS 1, Grade CD, Exposure 1.
C. OSB: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
2.2 INFILL AND REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
A. Use infill materials matching existing roofing system materials unless otherwise indicated.
1. Infill materials are specified in Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel deck is specified in Section 053100 "Steel Decking." C. Wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." D. Parapet Sheathing:
1. ASTM C1177/C1177M or ASTM C1278/C1278M water-resistant gypsum substrate; 1/2 inch thick.
E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav, and acceptable to new roofing system manufacturer.
2.3 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new roofing system.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 5
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions:
1. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed.
2. Loosely lay 1-inch- minimum thick, EPS insulation over existing roofing in areas not to be reroofed.
a. Loosely lay 15/32-inch plywood or OSB panels over EPS. Extend EPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch.
3. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been protected.
4. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing.
5. Comply with requirements of existing roof system manufacturer's warranty requirements.
B. Seal or isolate windows that may be exposed to airborne substances created in removal of existing materials.
C. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work.
D. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted.
1. Immediately notify Engineer of any blockages or restrictions.
E. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work.
1. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.
F. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
G. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday.
1. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. a. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. b. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
2. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding.
a. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing roofing system components that are to remain.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF
A. Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day and obtain authorization to proceed.
B. Lower removed roofing materials to ground and onto lower roof levels, using dust-tight chutes or other acceptable means of removing materials from roof areas.
C. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced, built-up bituminous roofing using a power broom.
D. Full Roof Tear-off: Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the existing roof deck concrete fill.
1. Remove vapor retarder roof insulation and cover board.
2. Remove base flashings and counter flashings.
3. Remove perimeter edge flashing and gravel stops.
4. Remove copings.
5. Remove expansion-joint covers.
6. Remove flashings at pipes, curbs, mechanical equipment, and other penetrations.
7. Remove roof drains indicated on Drawings to be removed.
8. Remove wood blocking, curbs, and nailers.
9. Bitumen and felts that are firmly bonded to concrete decks are permitted to remain if felts are dry.
a. Remove unadhered bitumen, unadhered felts, and wet felts.
10. Remove excess asphalt from steel deck.
a. A maximum of 15 lb/100 sq. ft. of asphalt is permitted to remain on steel decks.
3.3 DECK PREPARATION
A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system.
B. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Engineer.
1. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Engineer.
3.4 INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION
A. Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear-off areas to match existing roofing system construction.
1. Installation of infill materials is specified in Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing."
2. Installation of wood blocking, curbs, and nailers is specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.5 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION
A. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing roofing that inhibit new recover boards from conforming to substrate.
1. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced, built-up bituminous roofing with a power broom.
2. Broom clean existing substrate.
3. Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections.
4. Verify that existing substrate is dry.
a. Spot check substrates with an electrical capacitance moisture-detection meter.
5. Remove materials that are wet or damp.
a. Removal will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents.
B. Remove blisters and areas of roofing not fully adhered.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers.
1. Promptly dispose of demolished materials.
2. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
3. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.
B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 070150.19
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preparation for Reroofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 070150.19 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 071900 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrating water repellents.
2. MPI-approved water repellents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry assemblies.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.
2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat.
3. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in PART 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Applicator and testing agency.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent.
C. Preconstruction Test Reports: For water-repellent-treated substrates.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide water repellents listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 35 deg F and not more than 110 deg F, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
3. Protect materials from direct sunlight.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:
1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24 hours.
4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F.
5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water repellents must meet the following performance requirements as determined by preconstruction testing on manufacturer's standard substrates representing those indicated for this Project.
B. Water Absorption: Minimum 80 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for treated compared to untreated specimens when tested in accordance with the following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C140/C140M.
C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following:
1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated specimens, in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated specimens, in accordance with ASTM D1653.
D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate of treated compared to untreated specimens, in accordance with ASTM E514/E514M.
E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent performance after 2500 hours of weathering in accordance with ASTM G154 compared to water-repellent-treated specimens before weathering.
2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS
A. Penetrating Silane/Siloxane-Blend Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more active content of silane and siloxane blend with 600 g/L or less of VOCs.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.
b. BASF Corporation.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
2.3 MPI-APPROVED WATER REPELLENTS
A. Water Repellent, Clear (Not Paintable); MPI #117: Penetrating, silicone-oil type, clear waterrepellent for interior or exterior masonry block or brick, not intended for recoating.
1. VOC Content: 600 g/L or less.
2. MPI Green Performance Standard: GPS-2.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry in accordance with water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent.
3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.
B. Test pH level in accordance with water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age before application of water repellent, in accordance with repellent manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product in accordance with water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Concrete-Based Substrates: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents on concrete masonry unit substrate in accordance with ASTM E1857.
C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.
D. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 5
100% Design Submittal
3.3 APPLICATION OF WATER REPELLENTS
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.
B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied:
1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Engineer.
B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Engineer, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested.
2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions, as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Engineer.
END OF SECTION 071900
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Water Repellents
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 071900 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in masonry cells.
2. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
3. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope.
1. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Research Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
D. Provide documentation verifying that thermal insulation materials meet the pollutant emission limits in accordance with the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.2 (January 2017), as referenced in CALGreen. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes less than Class A, 25 and 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.
C. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): R-value as indicated on Drawings in accordance with ASTM C518.
2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, Foil Faced: ASTM C1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. Firestone Building Products.
c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. CertainTeed Insulation.
c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced: ASTM C665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. CertainTeed Insulation.
c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; complying with ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. Rockwool International.
c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
B. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Reinforced-Foil Faced: ASTM C665, Type III (reflective faced); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foilscrim polyethylene.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2.5 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.
b. Gemco.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.
B. Miscellaneous Application Accessories:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
3. Detailing Foam Insulation for Voids: Urethane foam complying with AAMA 812, low expansion pressure suitable for filling insulation gaps and voids adjacent to openings to protect against water, air, and sound intrusion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or those that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products, applications and applicable codes.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.
D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
5. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install unfaced blanket insulation over ceiling area in thickness indicated. Where partitions occur, extend insulation up either side of partition.
6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on Drawings. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
2. Detailing Foam Insulation for Voids: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.
B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Thermal Insulation Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vapor Retarders
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072600 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033010 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders.
2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation products.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, 15-mil thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. StegoWrap
b. Viper Vaporcheck
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vapor Retarders
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 072600 - 2
100% Design Submittal
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings.
B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.
E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction.
END OF SECTION 072600
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material panel Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative, structuralsupport Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel assembly during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel accessories.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E330:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, and accessories required for weathertight system.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA).
b. ALUCOBOND; 3A Composites USA, Inc.
c. Alucoil North America.
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 0.236 inch.
2. Core: Standard.
3. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
D. Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 5
100% Design Submittal
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:
1. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.
2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified.
1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.
3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 8
100% Design Submittal
1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.
G. Track-Support Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard horizontal tracks and vertical drain channels that provide support and secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints through drain tube. Attach metal composite material wall panels to tracks by interlocking panel edges with manufacturer's standard "T" clips.
1. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
2. Attach flush wall panels to perimeter extrusions by engaging panel edges and by attaching with manufacturer's standard structural silicone adhesive.
3. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
4. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.
H. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
I. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 9
100% Design Submittal
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories.
C. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and inspections.
D. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.23
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Metal Composite Material Wall Panels Renovation & Expansion Final Design 074213.23 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered polyvinyl chloride (PVC) roofing system.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Cover board.
5. Walkways.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for woodbased, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for premanufactured copings and roof edge flashings.
3. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for premanufactured roof expansion-joint assemblies.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 2
100% Design Submittal
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals' RoofNav listing.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following:
1. Layout and thickness of insulation.
2. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
3. Flashing details at penetrations.
4. Tapered insulation thickness and slopes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 3
100% Design Submittal
5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system.
6. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
7. Tie-in with air barrier.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
C. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, tests performed by independent qualified testing agency indicating compliance with specified requirements.
D. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, and other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 5
100% Design Submittal
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the wind uplift pressures as specified in the structural drawings and calculations, when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897.
D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-34 SH.
E. SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system and shall be listed in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for roof assembly identical for that specified for this Project.
1. Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 90 psf.
F. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D4434/D4434M, Type III, fabric reinforced.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems.
b. GAF.
c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
d. Sika Sarnafil; Sika Corporation.
e. Soprema, Inc.
2. Thickness: 60 mils.
3. Exposed Face Color: Gray.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.
2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet.
C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
D. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
1. Size: Not less than 4-inch diameter.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Water-Based, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard water-based, cold-applied adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing.
G. Low-Rise, Urethane, Fabric-Backed Membrane Adhesive: Roof system manufacturer's standard spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated for compatibility and use with fabric-backed membrane roofing.
H. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D1970/D1970M, polyethylene film laminated to layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40-mil total thickness; maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm; cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 7
100% Design Submittal
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by PVC roof membrane manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assemblies.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems.
b. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc.
c. Firestone Building Products.
d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2. Compressive Strength: 24 psi.
3. Size: 48 by 48 inches.
4. Thickness:
a. Base Layer: 1-1/2 inches.
b. Upper Layer: As required to achieve required R-value.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
1. Material: Match roof insulation.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Slope:
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C1278/C1278M fiber-reinforced gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 8
100% Design Submittal
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
1. Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches.
2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed.
4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture, and that minimum concrete internal relative humidity is not more than 75 percent, or as recommended by roofing system manufacturer, when tested according to ASTM F2170. a. Test Frequency: One test probe per each 1,000 sq. ft. of roof deck, with no fewer than three test probes.
b. Submit test reports within 24 hours of performing tests.
5. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.
6. Verify that joints in precast concrete roof decks have been grouted flush with top of concrete.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 9
100% Design Submittal
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie into existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install selfadhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 and 6 inches, respectively.
1. Extend vertically up parapet walls and projections to a minimum height equal to height of insulation and cover board.
2. Seal laps by rolling.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Installation Over Concrete Decks:
1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.
a. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 10
100% Design Submittal
d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. f. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate. g. Adhere base layer of insulation to vapor retarder according to FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows:
1) Set insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in adjacent rows.
c. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Loosely lay each layer of insulation units over substrate. i. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1- 29, as follows:
1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS
A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.
3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 11
100% Design Submittal
4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows:
a. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
B. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath roof membrane.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE
A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
D. Accurately align roof membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane.
F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof membrane and sheet flashings to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with requirements.
I. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 12
100% Design Submittal
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop unit locations.
c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations.
d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder.
e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations.
f. Locations indicated on Drawings.
g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.
3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Engineer.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Engineer, and to prepare inspection report.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 13
100% Design Submittal
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Engineer and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.12 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1. Owner: ________________.
2. Address: ________________.
3. Building Name/Type: ________________.
4. Address: ________________.
5. Area of Work: ________________.
6. Acceptance Date: _________________.
7. Warranty Period: ________________.
8. Expiration Date: __________________.
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period Roofing Installer will, at Roofing Installer's own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. Lightning.
b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 140.
c. Fire.
d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition.
e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work. f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing Renovation & Expansion Final Design 075419 - 14
100% Design Submittal
g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ___________________, ________________.
1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.
2. Name: ______________________________________.
3. Title: _______________________________________.
END OF SECTION 075419
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 077129 “Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints.”
3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings, roof-edge specialties, roofedge drainage systems, reglets, and counterflashings.
4. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
5. Section 079513.13 "Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for manufactured expansion-joint cover assemblies for interior floors, walls, and ceilings.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each of the following
1. Underlayment materials.
2. Elastomeric sealant.
3. Butyl sealant.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled Work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, flashings, and counterflashings.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long by actual width.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factoryapplied finishes.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For copings and roof edge flashing, from ICC-ES showing compliance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Special warranty.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Architectural Metal Flashing, Condensation and Air Leakage Control, and Reroofing" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
D. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
d. Henry Company; a Carlisle company.
e. Owens Corning.
f. Polyglass U.S.A., Inc.
g. Protecto Wrap Company.
h. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970/D1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187/D1187M.
F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified.
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
E. Seams:
1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
F. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Coping Profile: Fig. 3-4E in accordance with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup plate. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment:
1. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free.
2. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
3. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures.
4. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses.
5. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller.
6. Roll laps and edges with roller.
7. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant.
3. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
4. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 8
100% Design Submittal
5. Install continuous cleats with fasteners spaced not more than 12 inches o.c.
6. Space individual cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
7. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil-canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.
8. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch.
9. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressuretreated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. a. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. b. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
c. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way.
d. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. 1) Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF FLASHINGS
A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard.
1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 9
100% Design Submittal
2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Copings:
1. Install roof edge flashings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
2. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended in writing by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer.
C. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Engineer.
END OF SECTION 076200
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Renovation & Expansion Final Design 076200 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copings.
2. Roof-edge drainage systems.
3. Reglets and counterflashings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for downspout guards and downspout boots.
2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and adjacent materials.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Engineer, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.
2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.
3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.
1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.
3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments.
4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Include details of special conditions.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.
C. Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements that are FM Approvals listed for specified class and SPRI ES-1 tested to specified design pressure.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system warranty specified in Section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.
C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:
1. Design Pressure: As required by code .
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COPINGS
A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
1. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick thickness as required to meet performance requirements.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.
3. Special Fabrications: Two-way sloped coping cap.
4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
a. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous stainless steel.
2.3 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Architectural Products Company.
2. Berger Building Products, Inc.
3. Perimeter Systems; a division of SAF.
B. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick.
C. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
D. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and stiffened top edge, and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube that nests into upper end of downspout.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
E. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.
3. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
C. Accessories:
1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.
2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
D. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 MATERIALS
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:
2.6 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
2.8 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with ASTM A755/A755M and coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT
A. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 7
100% Design Submittal
protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.
C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF COPINGS
A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 8
100% Design Submittal
1. Interlock face-leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES
A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM
A. Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
C. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.
2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.
3. Seal or solder exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head.
E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor top edge 1 inch below scupper discharge.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A. Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings.
B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 9
100% Design Submittal
C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.
D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Specialties
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077100 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077129 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flanged bellows-type roof expansion joints.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs or cants for mounting roof expansion joints.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal expansion-joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.
3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for manufactured and prefabricated metal roof curbs.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Include details of splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, method of field assembly, and location and size of each field splice.
3. Provide isometric drawings of intersections, terminations, changes in joint direction or planes, and transition to other expansion joint systems depicting how components interconnect with each other and adjacent construction to allow movement and achieve waterproof continuity.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 6 inches in size. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077129 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of roofing membrane.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion joints and components that leak, deteriorate beyond normal weathering, or otherwise fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof expansion joints that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than five Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 FLANGED BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Flanged Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Joint: Factory-fabricated, continuous, waterproof, joint cover consisting of exposed membrane bellows laminated to flexible, closed-cell support foam, and secured along each edge to 3- to 4-inch- wide metal flange. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077129 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Architectural Art Manufacturing; a division of Pittcon Architectural Metals, LLC. b. Balco; a CSW Industrials Company.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
e. MM Systems Corporation.
f. Nystrom, Inc.
g. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
h. Sika.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain flanged bellows-type roof expansion joints approved by roofing manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty.
3. Joint Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent of joint size.
4. Bellows: PVC flexible membrane, nominal 60 mils thick.
5. Flanges: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.
6. Configuration: Roof to wall as indicated on Drawings.
7. Corner, Intersection, and Transition Units: Provide factory-fabricated units for corner and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion joints.
8. Cover Membrane: PVC flexible membrane, factory laminated to bellows and covering entire joint assembly and curbs.
a. Color: Grey.
9. Accessories: Provide splicing units, adhesives, and other components as recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for complete installation.
10. Secondary Seal: Continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary bellows assembly.
a. Drain-Tube Assemblies: Equip secondary seal with drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture to exterior-wall expansion joint cover. b. Thermal Insulation: Fill space above secondary seal with manufacturer's standard, factory-installed mineral-fiber insulation; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84.
B. Materials:
1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
2. PVC Membrane: ASTM D4434/D4434M, type standard with manufacturer for application.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: As recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077129 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C665.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joint openings, substrates, and expansion-control joint systems that interface with roof expansion joints, for suitable conditions where roof expansion joints will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints.
1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement.
Use fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and miscellaneous items as required to complete roof expansion joints.
2. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
3. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials.
4. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or squeeze membranes.
5. Provide uniform, neat seams.
6. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
B. Directional Changes: Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints.
C. Transitions to Other Expansion-Control Joint Assemblies: Coordinate installation of roof expansion joints with other exterior expansion-control joint assemblies specified in Section 079100 "Preformed Joint Seals" to result in watertight performance. Install factoryfabricated units at transitions between roof expansion joints and exterior expansion-control joint systems.
D. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and waterproof joints.
E. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 077129
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Equipment supports.
3. Roof walkways.
4. Roof screens:
a. Aluminum Support Framing: For direct attachment of screening panels to mechanical equipment; no base or curb required unless shown otherwise on drawings.
b. Sliding panels to permit easy access to mechanical equipment for servicing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and fieldassembled work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.
1.5 DELEGATED-DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Fo Roof Screen wall indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. Provide a design / detail for the rooftop screen to the roof deck.
2. Wind-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind restraints. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
4. Required clearances.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D2244. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 3
100% Design Submittal
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Adaptable Air Products.
b. LMCurbs.
c. Roof Curb Systems.
B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
D. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.125 inch thick.
1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
E. Construction:
1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 4
100% Design Submittal
4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-mounting flange or by use of leveler frame.
5. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
6. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.
7. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
8. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer along top flange of curb under top flange on side of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.
9. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
10. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch- thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
11. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as curb.
2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced perimeter metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural supports, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between structural supports; capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed structure-mounting flange at bottom.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Curbs Plus, Inc.
b. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
c. LMCurbs.
B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
D. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.125 inch thick.
1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
E. Construction:
1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system.
2. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.
3. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 5
100% Design Submittal
4. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements.
5. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch- thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb.
6. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support.
7. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
8. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated.
9. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
10. Security Grille: Provide where indicated on Drawings.
2.4 ROOF SCREEN
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. City Scapes Architectural Innovations; Envisor.
b. Or equal.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Frames: 6063 T6 extruded aluminum.
2. Screen: Vertical Corrugated metal.
3. Screen Heights: 52 inches.
4. Color: Slate gray.
5. Removable Screen Sections: as required.
2.5 METAL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 2605. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.
2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 6
100% Design Submittal
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished.
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M unless otherwise indicated.
D. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, round tube.
E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, galvanized.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.
C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 7
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.
E. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Roof Accessories
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 077200 - 8
100% Design Submittal
B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Clean off excess sealants.
E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preformed Joint Seals Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 079100 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preformed, foam joint seals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for liquid sealants applied over preformed seals in dual seal systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each preformed joint seal product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of preformed joint seal required, provide Samples with joint seals in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint seals.
D. Preformed Joint Seal Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint seal location and designation.
2. Joint width and movement capability.
3. Joint seal manufacturer and product name.
4. Joint seal color.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each preformed joint seal for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Warranties: For special warranties.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preformed Joint Seals Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079100 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Install mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive preformed joint seals specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace preformed joint seals that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish preformed joint seals to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PREFORMED, FOAM JOINT SEALS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Construction Specialties: Model VF-200.
2. EMSEAL; a Sika Company: Seismic Colorseal.
3. MM Systems Corporation: ColorJoint ESS.
4. Watson Bowman Acme Corporation: Wabo SeismicWeatherSeal.
5. Willseal LLC, part of Tremco CPG: Willseal Seismic.
B. Preformed, Foam Joint Seals (PTS-1): Manufacturer's standard joint seal manufactured from urethane or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths based on design criteria indicated, with factory- or fieldapplied adhesive for bonding to substrates.
1. Design Criteria:
a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+25 percent.
2. Joint Seal Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preformed Joint Seals Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by preformed-joint-seal manufacturer for joint substrates indicated.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to preformed joint seal manufacturer, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces; and formulated to promote best adhesion to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with preformed joint seals and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive preformed joint seals, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting preformed-joint seal performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing preformed joint seals to comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of preformed joint seal, including dust, paints (except for permanent protective coatings tested and approved for seal adhesion and compatibility by seal manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimal bond with preformed joint seals. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint seals. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Preformed Joint Seals Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079100 - 4
100% Design Submittal
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by preformed joint seal manufacturer or as indicated by tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint seal manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint seal bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of adhesive or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Installation of Preformed, Foam Joint Seals:
1. Install each length of seal immediately after removing protective wrapping.
2. Firmly secure compressed joint seals to joint gap side to obtain full bond using exposed pressure-sensitive adhesive or field-applied adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at splices, ends, turns, and intersections of joints.
4. For applications at low ambient temperatures, heat foam joint seal material in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect preformed joint seals from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so seals are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated seals immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Butyl joint sealants.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079100 "Preformed Joint Seals" for preformed compressible foam and precured joint seals.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested:
1. Joint-sealant location and designation.
2. Manufacturer and product name.
3. Type of substrate material.
4. Proposed test.
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.
E. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.
3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with masonry substrates.
4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.
5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 3
100% Design Submittal
7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation.
b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
c. The Dow Chemical Company.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
e. Tremco Incorporated.
2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C1311.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean, porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 7
100% Design Submittal
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1,000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 8
100% Design Submittal
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units. c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 9
100% Design Submittal
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
e. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies.
f. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
g. Joints between metal panels.
h. Joints between different materials listed above.
i. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers.
j. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. k. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions. d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
b. Sill plates.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
END OF SECTION 079200
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Joint Sealants
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079200 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior expansion joint cover assemblies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for expansion joint cover assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, block-out requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion joint.
2. Where expansion joint cover assemblies change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric-seal material.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of expansion joint cover assembly, full width by 6 inches long in size.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each fire-resistance-rated expansion joint cover assembly, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing.
B. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, crossconnections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion joint cover assemblies.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Expansion joint cover assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance according to UL 2079 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling assemblies shall be subjected to hose stream testing.
C. Expansion Joint Design Criteria:
1. Type of Movement: Thermal and Wind sway.
a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Maximum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type of Movement: Seismic.
a. Joint Movement: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Seismic-Pan Floor Joint Cover: Seismic pan assembly with sloped sides allowing extension of unit above floor plane during joint contraction and equipped with springs to return unit back into alignment during joint expansion. Provide manufacturer's recommended sealant at pan edge.
1. Application: New floor to existing floor.
2. Installation: Recessed.
3. Pan Recess Depth: As required to accommodate adjacent flooring.
B. Basis-of-Design: Series.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2.4 WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Dual-Elastomeric-Seal Wall Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of dual-elastomeric seals and center plate anchored to frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Application: Intersections of walls, corners, and ceilings.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Mill.
1) Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors and color densities.
4. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions. a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
5. Basis-of-Design:
a. Wall to Wall and Ceiling to Ceiling.
b. Wall to Corner and Wall to Ceiling.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.
B. Elastomeric Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames.
C. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to comply with performance criteria for required fire-resistance rating.
D. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible elastomeric material.
E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturer's standard attachment devices. Include anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces where expansion joint cover assemblies will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Notify Engineer where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion joint cover assembly installation and performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion joint cover assemblies. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint cover assemblies.
1. Repair or grout block out as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout.
2. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a. Shimming is not permitted.
3. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
4. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation.
5. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
C. Seals: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2. Seal transitions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change direction or abut other materials.
E. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices.
F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion joint cover assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over expansion joint cover assemblies. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 079513.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 079513.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 08
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.
2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
2. Section 099113 “Exterior Painting” for field painting of hollow-metal doors and frames.
C. Iron and steel products supplied under this section must comply with the American Iron and Steel provisions of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 2
100% Design Submittal
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems.
7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
8. Details of accessories.
9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For hollow-metal doors and frames with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches.
2. Fabrication: Prepare Samples approximately 12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction:
a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.
b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.
E. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.
F. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all metal products.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For door inspector.
1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 3
100% Design Submittal
2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4.
3. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.
B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fire-rated hollow-metal door and frame assembly, firerated borrowed-lite assembly, and thermally rated door assemblies for tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements.
C. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.
D. Field quality control reports.
E. Florida Regulatory Approvals: Provide copy of current, valid statewide product approval for product, material or system as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section, in accordance with Rule 9N-3. Product approval shall be for the specific manufacturer, product type, model or style, and the State Approval Number.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ceco Door; AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY.
2. Curries, AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Group.
3. Steelcraft; Allegion plc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 degrees F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
C. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than
0.61 when tested according to ASTM C518.
2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Core: Polyisocyanurate Vertical steel stiffener.
g. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard laminated mineral board core for firerated and temperature-rise-rated doors.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 5
100% Design Submittal
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.
At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.
g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
h. Core: Polyisocyanurate Vertical steel stiffener.
i. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener with insulation core for fire-rated doors.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.5 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as adjacent door assemblies.
2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3. Post Installed Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.
C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 7
100% Design Submittal
3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.
D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.
4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.
5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3.
1. Color and Gloss: Match Engineer's sample.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 8
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Floor Anchors: Secure with post installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar.
6. In-Place Concrete, precast panels, or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 9
100% Design Submittal
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Engineer.
B. Inspections:
1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door according to NFPA 80, Section 5.2.
2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.
E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.4 REPAIR
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 081113
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081113 - 10
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-laminate-faces.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware” for door hardware in flush wood doors.
2. Iron and steel products supplied under this section must comply with the American Iron and Steel provisions of the Contract.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:
1. Door core materials and construction.
2. Door edge construction
3. Door face type and characteristics.
4. Door frame construction.
5. Factory-machining criteria.
6. Factory- finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Door schedule indicating door and frame location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing.
2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses.
3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 2
100% Design Submittal
4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems.
5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment.
6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
7. Clearances and undercuts.
8. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements.
9. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors and factory-finished door frames.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Polymer edging, in manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
E. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all metal products.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Special warranties.
B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weathertight, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 3
100% Design Submittal
temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors and frames that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of veneer.
b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors and frames.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products by one of the following:
a. VT Industries, Inc.
b. Marshfield Doors Systems, Inc.
c. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite Company
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.
2.3 SOLID-CORE FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty.
2. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium.
3. Faces: Hardboard or MDF.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 4
100% Design Submittal
a. Apply MDO to directly to high-density hardboard crossbands. b. Hardboard Faces: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard). c. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.
4. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard.
1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
2) Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structuralcomposite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors scheduled to receive exit devices in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." b. Glued wood stave.
c. WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber.
1) Screw Withdrawal, Door Face: 550 lbf.
2) Screw Withdrawal, Vertical Door Edge: 550 lbf.
d. Either glued wood stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber.
5. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Metal Frames for Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, coldrolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.
2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware.
5. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 5
100% Design Submittal
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
4. Flash top of out swinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
2.6 FACTORY PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Factory prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors.
C. Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System-10, UV Curable, Water Based.
3. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System-11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed.
4. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A OP-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane.
5. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
6. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Flush Wood Doors
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 081416 - 6
100% Design Submittal
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.
1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 088000 “Glazing.”
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
2. Details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
3. Full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminumframed entrance and storefront systems, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
4. Connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type of exposed finish.
D. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed finish.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12- inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
G. Delegated Design Submittals: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminumframed entrance and storefront system.
B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, in accordance with recommendations in ASTM C1401. Include periodic qualitycontrol reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems.
B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront. Include ASTM C1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 3
100% Design Submittal
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Fabricator of products.
2. Entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
3. Authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
4. Entity that is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) and that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM E699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025 and acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review.
D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C1401 for design and installation of storefront systems that include structural glazing.
1.8 MOCKUPS
A. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations by Change Order.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operating components.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 4
100% Design Submittal
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing spandrel panels and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems to withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 5
100% Design Submittal
C. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans of up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Limited to 2L/175 at unsupported cantilevers.
D. Structural: Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
F. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.
G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor):
a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.41 as determined in accordance with NFRC 100.
b. Entrance Doors: U-factor of not more than 0.70 as determined in accordance with NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC):
a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.26 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 6
100% Design Submittal
b. Entrance Doors: SHGC of not more than0.23 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200.
3. Air Leakage:
a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than
0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
b. Entrance Doors: Air leakage of not more than 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Noise Reduction: Test in accordance with ASTM E90, with ratings determined by ASTM E1332, as follows.
1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 34.
I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested in accordance with AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
2.3 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Clear anodic finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 7
100% Design Submittal
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design: As indicated.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled , snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
4. Finish: Match adjacent storefront framing finish.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the door in motion.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Renovation & Expansion Final Design 084113 - 8
100% Design Submittal
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.